Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
January 2007
ANSYS, Inc.
Southpointe
275 Technology Drive
Canonsburg, PA 15317
ansysinfo@ansys.com
http://www.ansys.com
(T) 724-746-3304
(F) 724-514-9494
Disclaimer Notice
THIS ANSYS SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION INCLUDE TRADE SECRETS AND ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS
OF ANSYS, INC., ITS SUBSIDIARIES, OR LICENSORS.The software products and documentation are furnished by ANSYS, Inc., its subsidiaries, or affiliates
under a software license agreement that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, compliance with exporting
laws, warranties, disclaimers, limitations of liability, and remedies, and other provisions.The software products and documentation may be used, disclosed,
transferred, or copied only in accordance with the terms and conditions of that software license agreement.
ANSYS, Inc. and ANSYS Europe, Ltd. are UL registered ISO 9001:2000 Companies.
Third-Party Software
See the online documentation in the product help files for the complete Legal Notice for ANSYS proprietary software and third-party software.The ANSYS
third-party software information is also available via download from the Customer Portal on the ANSYS web page. If you are unable to access the thirdparty legal notices, please contact ANSYS, Inc.
Published in the U.S.A.
Table of Contents
1. Overview of Structural Analyses ............................................................................................................. 1
1.1. Types of Structural Analysis ............................................................................................................... 1
1.2. Elements Used in Structural Analyses ................................................................................................ 2
1.3. Material Model Interface ................................................................................................................... 2
1.4. Solution Methods ............................................................................................................................. 2
2. Structural Static Analysis ........................................................................................................................ 5
2.1. Linear vs. Nonlinear Static Analyses ................................................................................................... 5
2.2. Performing a Static Analysis .............................................................................................................. 5
2.2.1. Build the Model ....................................................................................................................... 5
2.2.1.1. Points to Remember ........................................................................................................ 6
2.2.2. Set Solution Controls ................................................................................................................ 6
2.2.2.1. Access the Solution Controls Dialog Box .......................................................................... 6
2.2.2.2. Using the Basic Tab .......................................................................................................... 6
2.2.2.3. The Transient Tab ............................................................................................................. 8
2.2.2.4. Using the Sol'n Options Tab ............................................................................................. 8
2.2.2.5. Using the Nonlinear Tab ................................................................................................... 8
2.2.2.6. Using the Advanced NL Tab ............................................................................................. 9
2.2.3. Set Additional Solution Options ............................................................................................... 9
2.2.3.1. Stress Stiffening Effects .................................................................................................. 10
2.2.3.2. Newton-Raphson Option ............................................................................................... 10
2.2.3.3. Prestress Effects Calculation ........................................................................................... 10
2.2.3.4. Mass Matrix Formulation ................................................................................................ 10
2.2.3.5. Reference Temperature .................................................................................................. 11
2.2.3.6. Mode Number ............................................................................................................... 11
2.2.3.7. Creep Criteria ................................................................................................................ 11
2.2.3.8. Printed Output .............................................................................................................. 11
2.2.3.9. Extrapolation of Results ................................................................................................. 11
2.2.4. Apply the Loads ..................................................................................................................... 12
2.2.4.1. Load Types .................................................................................................................... 12
2.2.4.1.1. Displacements (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ) ....................................................... 12
2.2.4.1.2. Velocities (VELX, VELY, VELZ, OMGX, OMGY, OMGZ) ................................................. 12
2.2.4.1.3. Forces (FX, FY, FZ) and Moments (MX, MY, MZ) ........................................................ 12
2.2.4.1.4. Pressures (PRES) .................................................................................................... 12
2.2.4.1.5. Temperatures (TEMP) ............................................................................................ 12
2.2.4.1.6. Fluences (FLUE) ..................................................................................................... 12
2.2.4.1.7. Gravity, Spinning, Etc. ............................................................................................ 12
2.2.4.2. Apply Loads to the Model .............................................................................................. 12
2.2.4.2.1. Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters ............................................... 13
2.2.4.3. Calculating Inertia Relief ................................................................................................ 13
2.2.4.3.1. Inertia Relief Output .............................................................................................. 14
2.2.4.3.2. Partial Inertia Relief Calculations ............................................................................ 14
2.2.4.3.3. Using a Macro to Perform Inertia Relief Calculations ............................................... 15
2.2.5. Solve the Analysis .................................................................................................................. 15
2.2.6. Review the Results ................................................................................................................. 15
2.2.6.1. Postprocessors .............................................................................................................. 16
2.2.6.2. Points to Remember ...................................................................................................... 16
2.2.6.3. Reviewing Results Data .................................................................................................. 16
2.2.6.4. Typical Postprocessing Operations ................................................................................. 16
2.3. A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method) ............................................................................................ 18
2.3.1. Problem Description .............................................................................................................. 18
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
vi
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
vii
viii
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
ix
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
xi
xii
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
xiii
xiv
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
xv
xvi
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
xvii
xviii
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
xix
xx
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
List of Figures
2.1. Diagram of Allen Wrench ...................................................................................................................... 19
3.1. Diagram of a Model Airplane Wing ........................................................................................................ 46
3.2. Choose Master DOF .............................................................................................................................. 55
3.3. Choosing Master DOFs .......................................................................................................................... 55
3.4. Choosing Masters in an Axisymmetric Shell Model ................................................................................. 56
4.1. Harmonic Response Systems ................................................................................................................. 59
4.2. Relationship Between Real/Imaginary Components and Amplitude/Phase Angle ................................... 64
4.3. An Unbalanced Rotating Antenna ......................................................................................................... 65
4.4. Two-Mass-Spring-System ...................................................................................................................... 72
5.1. Examples of Load-Versus-Time Curves ................................................................................................... 91
5.2. Examples of Gap Conditions ................................................................................................................ 108
5.3. Model of a Steel Beam Supporting a Concentrated Mass ...................................................................... 114
5.4. Effect of Integration Time Step on Period Elongation ........................................................................... 121
5.5. Transient Input vs. Transient Response ................................................................................................. 122
5.6. Rayleigh Damping .............................................................................................................................. 125
6.1. Single-Point and Multi-Point Response Spectra .................................................................................... 130
6.2. Simply Supported Beam with Vertical Motion of Both Supports ........................................................... 139
7.1. Buckling Curves .................................................................................................................................. 156
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
xxi
xxii
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
List of Tables
1.1. Structural Element Types ......................................................................................................................... 2
2.1. Basic Tab Options .................................................................................................................................... 7
2.2. Sol'n Options Tab Options ....................................................................................................................... 8
2.3. Nonlinear Tab Options ............................................................................................................................ 9
2.4. Advanced NL Tab Options ....................................................................................................................... 9
2.5. Loads Applicable in a Static Analysis ...................................................................................................... 13
3.1. Analysis Types and Options ................................................................................................................... 34
3.2. Loads Applicable in a Modal Analysis ..................................................................................................... 38
3.3. Load Commands for a Modal Analysis ................................................................................................... 38
3.4. Load Step Options ................................................................................................................................ 39
3.5. Expansion Pass Options ........................................................................................................................ 42
3.6. Symmetric System Eigensolver Choices ................................................................................................. 51
4.1. Analysis Types and Options ................................................................................................................... 62
4.2. Applicable Loads in a Harmonic Response Analysis ................................................................................ 65
4.3. Load Commands for a Harmonic Response Analysis ............................................................................... 66
4.4. Load Step Options ................................................................................................................................ 67
4.5. Expansion Pass Options ........................................................................................................................ 79
5.1. Transient Tab Options ........................................................................................................................... 94
5.2. Options for the First Load Step: Mode-Superposition Analysis .............................................................. 103
5.3. Options for the First Load Step-Reduced Analysis ................................................................................. 109
5.4. Expansion Pass Options ....................................................................................................................... 111
5.5. Damping for Different Analysis Types .................................................................................................. 124
5.6. Damping Matrix Formulation with Different Damping Coefficients ....................................................... 126
6.1. Analysis Types and Options ................................................................................................................. 132
6.2. Load Step Options .............................................................................................................................. 132
6.3. Solution Items Available in a PSD Analysis ........................................................................................... 149
6.4. Organization of Results Data from a PSD Analysis ................................................................................. 150
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
xxiii
xxiv
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Fracture mechanics
Composites
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Fatigue
p-Method
Beam Analyses
Note
Explicit dynamics analysis can use only the explicit dynamic elements (LINK160, BEAM161, PLANE162,
SHELL163, SOLID164, COMBI165, MASS166, LINK167, and SOLID168).
Element Name(s)
LINK1, LINK8, LINK10, LINK180
BEAM3, BEAM4, BEAM23, BEAM24, BEAM44, BEAM54, BEAM188, BEAM189
PIPE16, PIPE17, PIPE18, PIPE20, PIPE59, PIPE60
PLANE25, PLANE42, PLANE82, PLANE83, VISCO88, VISCO106, VISCO108,
PLANE145, PLANE146, PLANE182, PLANE183
SOLID45, SOLID46, SOLID65, VISCO89, SOLID92, SOLID95, VISCO107, SOLID147,
SOLID148, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLID191, SHELL281
SHELL28, SHELL41, SHELL43, SHELL61, SHELL63, SHELL91, SHELL93, SHELL99,
SHELL150, SHELL181, SHELL208.
SOLSH190
INTER192, INTER193, INTER194, INTER195
CONTAC12, CONTAC52, TARGE169, TARGE170, CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176, CONTA177, CONTA178
SOLID5, PLANE13, FLUID29, FLUID30, FLUID38, SOLID62, FLUID79, FLUID80,
FLUID81, SOLID98, FLUID129, INFIN110, INFIN111, FLUID116, FLUID130
COMBIN7, LINK11, COMBIN14, MASS21, MATRIX27, COMBIN37, COMBIN39,
COMBIN40, MATRIX50, SURF153, SURF154
LINK160, BEAM161, PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, COMBI165, MASS166,
LINK167, SOLID168
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
More information about the loads that you can apply in a static analysis appears in Section 2.2.4: Apply the Loads.
The following topics are available for structural static analysis:
2.1. Linear vs. Nonlinear Static Analyses
2.2. Performing a Static Analysis
2.3. A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method)
2.4. A Sample Static Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
2.5. Where to Find Other Examples
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Material properties can be linear or nonlinear, isotropic or orthotropic, and constant or temperature-dependent.
You must define stiffness in some form (for example,Young's modulus (EX), hyperelastic coefficients,
and so on).
For inertia loads (such as gravity), you must define the data required for mass calculations, such as
density (DENS).
For thermal loads (temperatures), you must define the coefficient of thermal expansion (ALPX).
Regions where stresses or strains vary rapidly (usually areas of interest) require a relatively finer mesh than
regions where stresses or strains are nearly constant (within an element).
While considering the influence of nonlinearities, remember that the mesh should be able to capture the
effects of the nonlinearities. For example, plasticity requires a reasonable integration point density (and
therefore a fine element mesh) in areas with high plastic deformation gradients.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
When setting ANTYPE and NLGEOM, choose Small Displacement Static if you are performing a new
analysis and you want to ignore large deformation effects such as large deflection, large rotation, and
large strain. Choose Large Displacement Static if you expect large deflections (as in the case of a long,
slender bar under bending) or large strains (as in a metal-forming problem). Choose Restart Current
Analysis if you want to restart a failed nonlinear analysis, if you have previously completed a static analysis and you want to specify additional loads, or if you wish to use the Jobname.RSX information from
a previous VT Accelerator run. Note that in a VT Accelerator run, you cannot restart a job in the middle;
you can only rerun the job from the beginning with changes in the input parameters.
When setting TIME, remember that this load step option specifies time at the end of the load step.The
default value is 1.0 for the first load step. For subsequent load steps, the default is 1.0 plus the time specified
for the previous load step. Although time has no physical meaning in a static analysis (except in the case
of creep, viscoplasticity, or other rate-dependent material behavior), it is used as a convenient way of referring to load steps and substeps (see Chapter 2: Loading in the Basic Analysis Guide).
Caution
By default, only 1000 results sets can be written to the results file (Jobname.RST). If this
number is exceeded (based on your OUTRES specification), the program will terminate with
an error. Use the command /CONFIG,NRES to increase the limit (see Chapter 19: Memory
Management and Configuration in the Basic Analysis Guide).
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Program chosen solver (ANSYS selects a solver for you, based on the physics of the problem)
Sparse direct solver (default for linear and nonlinear, static and full transient analyses)
Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient (PCG) solver (recommended for large models/high wavefronts,
bulky structures)
Algebraic Multigrid (AMG) solver (applicable in the same situations as the PCG solver, but provides
parallel processing; for faster turnaround times when used in a multiprocessor environment)
Iterative solver (auto-select; for linear static/full transient structural or steady-state thermal analyses
only; recommended)
Note
The AMG solver is part of ANSYS Mechanical HPC, which is a separately-licensed product. See
Chapter 15: Using Shared-Memory ANSYS in the Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide for more information about using the AMG solver.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
ARCTRM]
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Stress stiffening is relevant only in nonlinear analyses. If you are performing a linear analysis [NLGEOM,OFF],
you can turn stress stiffening OFF.
Prior to the analysis, you know that the structure is not likely to fail because of buckling (bifurcation, snap
through).
Including stress stiffness terms, in general, accelerates nonlinear convergence characteristics. Keeping in mind
the points listed above, you may choose to turn stress stiffening OFF for specific problems in which convergence
difficulties are seen; for example, local failures.
Command(s): SSTIF
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Options
Program-chosen (default)
Full
Modified
Initial stiffness
Note
The stress stiffening effects and the prestress effect calculation both control the generation of the
stress stiffness matrix, and therefore should not be used together in an analysis. If both are specified,
the last option specified will override the previous setting.
Command(s): PSTRES
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Options
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Note
For a static analysis, the mass matrix formulation you use does not significantly affect the solution
accuracy (assuming that the mesh is fine enough). However, if you want to do a prestressed dynamic
analysis on the same model, the choice of mass matrix formulation may be important; see the appropriate dynamic analysis section for recommendations.
Command(s): LUMPM
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Options
Caution
Proper use of multiple OUTPR commands can sometimes be a little tricky. See Section 2.6.4: Output
Controls in the Basic Analysis Guide for more information on how to use this command.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
11
2.2.4.1.3. Forces (FX, FY, FZ) and Moments (MX, MY, MZ)
These are concentrated loads usually specified on the model exterior.The directions implied by the labels are
in the nodal coordinate system.
12
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category
The model should not contain axisymmetric or generalized plane strain elements, or nonlinearities.
Models with a mixture of 2-D and 3-D element types are not recommended.
The effects of offsets and tapering are ignored for beam elements (BEAM23, BEAM24, BEAM44, and
BEAM54) as well as for layered elements (SHELL91, SHELL99, SOLID46, and SOLID191).The effects of unsymmetrical layups for layered elements are also ignored. (Breaking up each tapered element into several
elements will give a more accurate solution.)
Specify only the minimum number of displacement constraints - those required to prevent rigid-body
motion.Three constraints (or fewer, depending on the element type) are necessary for 2-D models and
six (or fewer) are necessary for 3-D models. Additional constraints, such as those required to impose
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
13
The loads for which inertia relief calculations are desired should be applied.
Issue the IRLF command before the SOLVE command as part of the inertia load commands.
Command(s): IRLF,1
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Inertia Relief
Inertia Relief for Substructures
For substructures, inertia relief calculations (MATRIX50) use the equations described in Section 15.2: Inertia Relief
in the Theory Reference for ANSYS and ANSYS Workbench. ANSYS obtains the mass matrix of a substructure via
matrix reduction to condense it to the master nodes (MASTER).The inertia relief calculations in a substructure
are therefore consistent with the reduced mass contribution at the master nodes.
The IRLF command has no effect in the generation pass of a substructure. If you intend to perform inertia relief
calculations on a substructure, do not apply DOF constraints (D) on the substructure during its generation pass;
instead, apply them during the use pass. (Otherwise, the substructure reduction logic condenses out the mass
associated with the constrained DOFs in the generation pass, and the inertia relief calculations in the use pass
of the substructure reflect the condensed mass distribution.)
In the expansion pass, precalculation of masses for summary printout (IRLF,-1) occurs only on elements that are
part of the substructure.
14
!
!
!
!
!
!
See the Commands Reference for discussions of the OUTPR, IRLF, IRLIST, and PSOLVE commands.
Save a backup copy of the database to a named file.You can then retrieve your model by reentering the
ANSYS program and issuing RESUME.
Command(s): SAVE
GUI: Utility Menu> File> Save as
2.
3.
If you want the analysis to include additional loading conditions (that is, multiple load steps), you will
need to repeat the process of applying loads, specifying load step options, saving, and solving for each
load step. (Other methods for handling multiple load steps are described in Chapter 2: Loading in the
Basic Analysis Guide.)
4.
Leave SOLUTION.
Command(s): FINISH
GUI: Close the Solution menu.
Primary data:
Derived data:
Element forces
and so on
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
15
2.2.6.1. Postprocessors
You can review these results using POST1, the general postprocessor, and POST26, the time-history processor.
POST1 is used to review results over the entire model at specific substeps (time-points). Some typical
POST1 operations are explained below.
POST26 is used in nonlinear static analyses to track specific result items over the applied load history. See
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis for the use of POST26 in a nonlinear static analysis. For a complete
description of all postprocessing functions, see Chapter 4: An Overview of Postprocessing in the Basic Analysis Guide.
To review results in POST1 or POST26, the database must contain the same model for which the solution
was calculated.
2.
Read in the desired set of results. Identify the data set by load step and substep numbers or by time. (If
you specify a time value for which no results are available, the ANSYS program will perform linear interpolation on all the data to calculate the results at that time.)
Command(s): SET
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> By Load Step
3.
Perform the necessary POST1 operations.Typical static analysis POST1 operations are explained below.
16
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Total (default)
Static component
Damping component
Inertia component
For a body in equilibrium, the total load (using all FORCE components) is zero at all nodes except where an applied
load or reaction load exists.
Option: Line Element Results
For line elements, such as beams, spars, and pipes, use ETABLE to gain access to derived data (stresses, strains,
and so on) (Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table> Define Table). Results data are identified by a
combination of a label and a sequence number or component name on the ETABLE command. See the ETABLE
discussion in The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide for details.
Option: Error Estimation
For linear static analyses using solid or shell elements, use the PRERR command to list the estimated solution
error due to mesh discretization (Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Percent Error).This command
calculates and lists the percent error in structural energy norm (SEPC), which represents the error relative to a
particular mesh discretization.
Option: Structural Energy Error Estimation
Use PLESOL,SERR to contour the element-by-element structural energy error (SERR) (Main Menu> General
Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Element Solu). Regions of high SERR on the contour display are good
candidates for mesh refinement. (You can activate automatic mesh refinement by means of the ADAPT command
- see the Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information.) See Section 5.2.6: Estimating Solution Error in the
Basic Analysis Guide for more details about error estimation.
Option: Contour Displays
Use PLNSOL and PLESOL to contour almost any result item, such as stresses (SX, SY, SZ...), strains (EPELX, EPELY,
EPELZ...), and displacements (UX, UY, UZ...) (Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot>
Nodal Solu or Element Solu).
The KUND field on PLNSOL and PLESOL gives you the option of overlaying the undeformed shape on the display.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
17
Caution
Derived data, such as stresses and strains, are averaged at the nodes by the PLNSOL command.This
averaging results in "smeared" values at nodes where elements of different materials, different shell
thicknesses, or other discontinuities meet.To avoid the smearing effect, use selecting (described in
Chapter 7: Selecting and Components in the Basic Analysis Guide) to select elements of the same material, same shell thickness, and so on before issuing PLNSOL. Alternatively, use PowerGraphics with
the AVRES command (Main Menu> General Postproc> Options for Outp) to not average results
across different materials and/or different shell thicknesses.
Option: Vector Displays
Use PLVECT to view vector displays (Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Vector Plot> Predefined)
and PRVECT to view vector listings (Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Vector Data).
Vector displays (not to be confused with vector mode) are an effective way of viewing vector quantities, such as
displacement (DISP), rotation (ROT), and principal stresses (S1, S2, S3).
Option: Tabular Listings
Use these commands to produce tabular listings:
Command(s): PRNSOL (nodal results), PRESOL (element-by-element results) PRRSOL (reaction data),
and so on
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> solution option
Use the NSORT and ESORT commands to sort the data before listing them (Main Menu> General Postproc>
List Results> Sorted Listing> Sort Nodes or Sort Elems).
Other Postprocessing Capabilities
Many other postprocessing functions - mapping results onto a path, load case combinations, and so on - are
available in POST1. See Chapter 4: An Overview of Postprocessing in the Basic Analysis Guide for details.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
7.5 cm
20 cm
20 N
r = 1 cm
10 mm
100 N
2.
Type the text "Static Analysis of an Allen Wrench" and click on OK.
Click once in the Input Window to make it active for text entry.
2.
Type the command /UNITS,SI and press ENTER. Notice that the command is stored in the history buffer,
which can be accessed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the input window.
3.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Angular Units.The Angular Units for Parametric
Functions dialog box appears.
4.
In the drop down menu for Units for angular parametric functions, select "Degrees DEG."
5.
Click on OK.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters.The Scalar Parameters dialog box
appears.
2.
Type the following parameters and their values in the Selection field. Click on Accept after you define
each parameter. For example, first type exx = 2.07e11 in the Selection field and then click on Accept.
Continue entering the remaining parameters and values in the same way.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
19
Value
2.07E11
.01
W_HEX* TAN(30)
.075
.2
.01
.0075
2
25E-6
Description
Young's modulus is 2.07E11 Pa
Width of hex across flats = .01 m
Width of flat = .0058 m
Length of shank (short end) .075 m
Length of handle (long end) .2 m
Bend radius .01 m
Element length .0075 m
Number of divisions along hex flat = 2
Tolerance for selecting node = 25E-6 m
Note
You can type the labels in upper- or lowercase; ANSYS always displays the labels in uppercase.
3.
Click on Close.
4.
2.
3.
4.
In the scroll box on the right, click once on "Brick 8node 45."
5.
6.
Scroll up the list on the right to "Quad 4node 42." Click once to select it.
7.
Click on OK to define Quad 4node42 as element type 2.The Library of Element Types dialog box closes.
8.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models.The Define Material Model Behavior dialog box appears.
2.
In the Material Models Available window, double-click on the following options: Structural, Linear,
Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears.
3.
Type the text EXX in the EX field (for Young's modulus), and .3 for PRXY.
Click on OK.This sets Young's modulus to the parameter specified above. Material Model Number 1
appears in the Material Models Defined window on the left.
4.
Choose menu path Material> Exit to remove the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box.
20
1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Areas> Polygon> By Side Length.
The Polygon by Side Length dialog box appears.
2.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Keypoints> In Active CS.The
Create Keypoints in Active Coordinate System dialog box appears.
2.
3.
Click on Apply.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Window Controls> Window Options.The Window Options
dialog box appears.
2.
In the Location of triad drop down menu, select "At top left."
3.
Click on OK.
4.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Pan/Zoom/Rotate.The Pan-Zoom-Rotate dialog box appears.
5.
6.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> View Settings> Angle of Rotation.The Angle of Rotation
dialog box appears.
7.
8.
In the Axis of rotation drop down menu, select "Global Cartes X."
9.
Click on OK.
10. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Numbering.The Plot Numbering Controls dialog box
appears.
11. Click the Keypoint numbers radio button to turn keypoint numbering on.
12. Click the Line numbers radio button to turn line numbering on.
13. Click on OK.
14. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Lines> Lines> Straight Line.
The Create Straight Line picking menu appears.
15. Click once on keypoints 4 and 1 to create a line between keypoints 1 and 4. (If you have trouble reading
the keypoint numbers in the ANSYS Graphics window, use the controls on the Pan-Zoom-Rotate dialog
box (Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Pan/Zoom/Rotate) to zoom in.)
16. Click once on keypoints 7 and 8 to create a line between keypoints 7 and 8.
17. Click once on keypoints 8 and 9 to create a line between keypoints 8 and 9.
18. Click on OK.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
21
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Lines> Line Fillet.The Line Fillet
picking menu appears.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Numbering.The Plot Numbering Controls dialog box
appears.
2.
3.
Click on OK.
4.
5.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate> Booleans> Divide> With Options> Area by Line.The Divide Area by Line picking menu appears.
6.
7.
8.
Click once on line 7. (If you have trouble reading the line numbers in the ANSYS Graphics window, use
the controls on the Pan-Zoom-Rotate dialog box (Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Pan/Zoom/Rotate) to zoom
in.)
9.
Click on OK.The Divide Area by Line with Options dialog box appears. In the Subtracted lines will be
drop down menu, select Kept. Click OK.
10. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Comp/Assembly> Create Component.The Create Component
dialog box appears.
11. Enter BOTAREA for component name.
12. In the Component is made of drop down menu, select "Areas."
13. Click on OK.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls> Lines> Picked Lines.The
Element Size on Picked Lines picking menu appears.
2.
3.
Click on OK in the picking menu.The Element Sizes on Picked Lines dialog box appears.
4.
22
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Elem Attributes.The
Element Attributes dialog box appears.
2.
In the Element type number drop down menu, select 2 PLANE42 and click on OK.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesher Opts.The Mesher Options dialog
box appears.
4.
In the Mesher Type field, click on the Mapped radio button and then click on OK.The Set Element Shape
dialog box appears.
5.
6.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh> Areas> Mapped> 3 or 4 sided.The
Mesh Areas picking box appears.
2.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Elem Attributes.The
Element Attributes dialog box appears.
2.
In the Element type number drop down menu, select 1 SOLID45 and click on OK.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls> Global> Size.The Global
Element Sizes dialog box appears.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click on OK.
8.
9.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate> Extrude> Areas> Along Lines.
The Sweep Areas along Lines picking box appears.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Comp/Assembly> Select Comp/Assembly.The Select
Component or Assembly dialog appears.
2.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
23
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Clear> Areas.The Clear Areas picking menu
appears.
4.
5.
6.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Comp/Assembly> Select Comp/Assembly.The Select
Component or Assembly dialog appears.
2.
3.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities.The Select Entities dialog box appears.
4.
5.
6.
Click on Apply.
7.
8.
9.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Symbols.The Symbols dialog box appears.
2.
Click on the "All Applied BCs" radio button for Boundary condition symbol.
3.
4.
In the Show pres and convect as drop down menu, select "Arrows."
5.
Click on OK.
24
1.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities.The Select Entities dialog appears.
2.
3.
5.
6.
7.
Click on Reselect.
8.
9.
25
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File.The Write Load Step File
dialog appears.
2.
3.
Click on OK.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters.The Scalar Parameters dialog box
appears.
2.
Type the text PDOWN=20/(W_FLAT*(MAXYVAL-MINYVAL)) in the Selection text box and click on Accept.
3.
Click on Close.
4.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities.The Select Entities dialog appears.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
26
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File.The Write Load Step File
dialog box appears.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> From LS Files.The Solve Load Step Files dialog box
appears.
2.
3.
4.
Click on the Close button after the Solution is done! window appears.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set.
2.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solu.The List Reaction
Solution dialog box appears.
3.
4.
5.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Symbols.The Symbols dialog box appears.
6.
Click on the "None" radio button for Boundary condition symbol, and click on OK.
7.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Edge Options.The Edge Options dialog box appears.
8.
In the Element outlines for non-contour/contour plots drop down menu, select "Edge Only/All."
9.
Click on OK.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape.The Plot Deformed
Shape dialog box appears.
11. Click on the "Def + undeformed" radio button and click on OK.
12. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Save Plot Ctrls.The Save Plot Controls dialog box appears.
13. Type "pldisp.gsa" in the Selection box, and click on OK.
14. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> View Settings> Angle of Rotation.The Angle of Rotation
dialog box appears.
15. Enter 120 for Angle in degrees.
16. In the Relative/absolute drop down menu, select "Relative angle."
17. In the Axis of rotation drop down menu, select "Global Cartes Y."
18. Click on OK.
19. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu.The
Contour Nodal Solution Data dialog box appears.
20. In the scroll box on the left, click on "Stress." In the scroll box on the right, click on "Intensity SINT."
21. Click on OK.
22. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Save Plot Ctrls.The Save Plot Controls dialog box appears.
23. Type "plnsol.gsa" in the Selection box, and click on OK.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
27
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> Next Set.
2.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solu.The List Reaction
Solution dialog box appears.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape.The Plot Deformed
Shape dialog box appears.
8.
Click on the "Def + undeformed" radio button if it is not already selected and click on OK.
9.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> WorkPlane> Offset WP by Increments.The Offset WP tool box appears.
2.
3.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Hidden Line Options.The Hidden-Line Options
dialog box appears.
4.
In the drop down menu for Type of Plot, select "Capped hidden."
5.
In the drop down menu for Cutting plane is, select "Working plane."
6.
Click on OK.
7.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Pan-Zoom-Rotate.The Pan-Zoom-Rotate tool box appears.
8.
Click on "WP."
9.
10. On the Pan-Zoom-Rotate dialog box, click on the large round dot several times to zoom in on the cross
section.
28
1.
2.
3.
Click on OK.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
29
30
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
31
32
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
2.
3.
4.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
33
If applying element damping, define the required real constants for the specific element type (COMBIN7,
COMBIN14, COMBIN37, and so on).
34
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Note
When you specify a modal analysis, a Solution menu that is appropriate for modal analyses appears.
The Solution menu will be either abridged or unabridged, depending on the actions you took
prior to this step in your ANSYS session.The abridged menu contains only those solution options
that are valid and/or recommended for modal analyses. If you are on the abridged Solution menu
and you want to access other solution options (that is, solution options that are valid for you to use,
but their use may not be encouraged for this type of analysis), select the Unabridged Menu option.
For details, see Section 3.4.1: Using Abridged Solution Menus in the Basic Analysis Guide.
Note
In the single point response spectrum (SPOPT,SPRS) and Dynamic Design analysis method (SPOPT,DDAM), the modal expansion can be performed after the spectrum analysis, based on the significance factor SIGNIF on the MXPAND command. If you want to perform modal expansion after
the spectrum analysis use MXPAND,-1.
Note
Restarts are not valid in a modal analysis. If you need to apply different sets of boundary conditions,
do a new analysis each time (or use the "partial solution" procedure described in Chapter 3: Solution
in the Basic Analysis Guide).
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
35
Subspace method
The subspace method is used for large symmetric eigenvalue problems. Several solution controls are
available to control the subspace iteration process.
When doing a modal analysis with a large number of constraint equations, use the subspace method with
the frontal solver instead of the JCG solver, or use the Block Lanczos or PCG Lanczos mode-extraction
method.
Unsymmetric method
The unsymmetric method is used for problems with unsymmetric matrices, such as fluid-structure interaction problems.
Damped method
The damped method is used for problems where damping cannot be ignored, such as bearing problems.
QR Damped method
The QR damped method is faster and achieves better calculation efficiency than the damped method. It
uses the reduced modal damped matrix to calculate complex damped frequencies in modal coordinates.
For most applications, you will use the Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, subspace, or reduced method.The unsymmetric, damped, and QR damped methods are meant for special applications.
When you specify a mode-extraction method, ANSYS automatically chooses the appropriate equation solver.
Note
The damped, unsymmetric, and QR damped methods are not available in the ANSYS Professional
program.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Note
You can use only axisymmetric loads for prestressing harmonic elements such as PLANE25 and
SHELL61.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
37
Note
Other loads - forces, pressures, temperatures, accelerations, and so on - can be specified in a modal
analysis, but they are ignored for the mode-extraction. However, the program will calculate a load
vector and write it to the mode shape file (Jobname.MODE) so that it can be used in a subsequent
mode-superposition harmonic or transient analysis.
Solid Model
or FE
Solid Model
Solid Model
Solid Model
Finite Elem
Entity
Keypoints
Lines
Areas
Nodes
Apply
DK
DL
DA
D
Delete
DKDELE
DLDELE
DADELE
DDELE
List
DKLIST
DLLIST
DALIST
DLIST
DSYM, DCUM
38
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Command
ALPHAD
BETAD
MP,DAMP
R
MP,DMPR
Damping is valid only for the damped and QR damped mode-extraction methods. Damping is ignored for the
other mode-extraction methods; see the Note below.
If you include damping and specify the damped mode-extraction method, the calculated eigenvalues and eigenvectors are complex. If you include damping and specify the QR damped mode-extraction method, the eigenvalues
are complex. However, the real eigenvectors are used for the mode superposition analysis. See Section 3.13:
Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods for details. Also see the section Section 5.9.3: Damping in Chapter 5: Transient
Dynamic Analysis for more information on damping.
Only the QR damped method supports the constant material damping coefficient application in a downstream
mode superposition harmonic analysis.The QR damped eigen analysis itself, however, does not include the effect
of the constant material damping coefficient.The corresponding modal damping matrix is formulated during
modal harmonic analysis.
Note
Damping can be specified in a non-damped modal analysis if a single-point response spectrum
analysis is to follow the modal analysis. Although the damping does not affect the eigenvalue solution,
it is used to calculate an effective damping ratio for each mode, which is then used to calculate the
response to the spectrum. Spectrum analyses are discussed in Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
39
Note
You can retrieve a participation factor or mode coefficient by issuing a *GET command.The factor
or coefficient is valid for the excitation (assumed unit displacement spectrum) directed along the
last of the applicable coordinates (rotation about the Z axis for a 3-D analysis).To retrieve a participation factor or mode coefficient for another direction, perform a spectrum analysis with the excitation
set (SED) to the desired direction, then issue another *GET command.
3.4.7. Solve
Before you solve, you should save (SAVE) a back-up copy of the database to a named file.You can then retrieve
your model by reentering the ANSYS program and issuing RESUME.
Now start the solution calculations.
Command(s): SOLVE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS
3.4.7.1. Output
The output from the solution consists mainly of the natural frequencies, which are printed as part of the printed
output (Jobname.OUT) and also written to the mode shape file (Jobname.MODE).The printed output may
include reduced mode shapes and the participation factor table, depending on your analysis options and output
controls. No mode shapes are written to the database or to the results file, so you cannot postprocess the results
yet.To do this, you need to expand the modes (explained next).
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options.The Modal Analysis
dialog box appears.
2.
Choose Subspace as the mode-extraction method and specify the number of modes to extract; then
click OK.The Subspace Modal Analysis dialog box appears.
3.
To change the shift point that was used in the eigenvalue extraction, you can issue the MODOPT,,,FREQB command. If you prefer to use the GUI to change the shift point, follow these steps:
40
1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options.The Modal Analysis
dialog box appears.
2.
Choose Subspace as the mode-extraction method and specify the number of modes to extract; then
click OK.The Subspace Modal Analysis dialog box appears.
3.
Note
The full extraction methods also write the mode shapes to the results file by default during the
modal analysis irrespective of the MXPAND command.To not write the mode shapes with MODOPT,LANB only, use MXPAND,-1.
Expanded modes are also required for subsequent spectrum analyses. In the single point response spectrum
(SPOPT,SPRS) and dynamic design analysis method (SPOPT,DDAM), the modal expansion can be performed
after the spectrum analysis, based on the significance factor SIGNIF on the MXPAND command. If you want
to perform modal expansion after the spectrum analysis use MXPAND,-1. No expansion is necessary for subsequent
mode superposition analyses.
Note
You must explicitly leave SOLUTION (using the FINISH command) and reenter (/SOLU) before
performing the expansion pass.
2.
Activate the expansion pass and its options. ANSYS offers these options for the expansion pass:
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
41
GUI Path
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> ExpansionPass
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single Expand> Expand Modes
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single Expand> Expand Modes
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single Expand> Expand Modes
Specify load step options.The only options valid in a modal expansion pass are output controls:
Printed output
Use this option to include any results data (expanded mode shapes, stresses, and forces) on the
printed output file (Jobname.OUT).
Command(s): OUTPR
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout
4.
42
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 for additional modes to be expanded (in different frequency ranges, for example).
Each expansion pass is stored as a separate load step on the results file.
Caution
Spectrum analyses expect all expanded modes to be in one load step. In the single point
response spectrum (SPOPT,SPRS) and Dynamic Design analysis method (SPOPT,DDAM),
the modal expansion can be performed after the spectrum analysis, based on the significance
factor SIGNIF on the MXPAND command. If you want to perform modal expansion after the
spectrum analysis use MXPAND,-1..
6.
Note
The expansion pass has been presented here as a separate step. However, if you include the MXPAND
command in the modal solution step, the program not only extracts the eigenvalues and eigenvectors,
but also expands the specified mode shapes.
Natural frequencies
You can review these results in POST1 [/POST1], the general postprocessor. Some typical postprocessing operations for a modal analysis are described below. For a complete description of all postprocessing functions, see
Chapter 4: An Overview of Postprocessing in the Basic Analysis Guide.
If you want to review results in POST1, the database must contain the same model for which the solution
was calculated.
Read in results data from the appropriate substep. Each mode is stored on the results file as a separate
substep. If you expand six modes, for instance, your results file will have one load step consisting of six
substeps.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
43
Perform any desired POST1 operations.Typical modal analysis POST1 operations are explained below:
Command(s): SET,LIST
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results
Note
To display the master DOFs graphically, plot the nodes (Utility Menu> Plot> Nodes or command
NLIST).
44
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Caution
Derived data, such as stresses and strains, are averaged at the nodes by the PLNSOL command.This
averaging results in "smeared" values at nodes where elements of different materials, different shell
thicknesses, or other discontinuities meet.To avoid the smearing effect, use selecting (described in
Chapter 7: Selecting and Components in the Basic Analysis Guide) to select elements of the same material, same shell thickness, and so on before issuing PLNSOL.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
45
x
z
E
C
A
10"
B
B (2,0,0)
C (2.3,.2,0)
D (1.9,.45,0)
E (1,.25,0)
2"
The detailed step-by-step procedure for this example, Modal Analysis of a Model Airplane Wing, is included in
the Modal Tutorial.
46
!
!
!
!
1
2
keypoints 1 and 2
keypoints 5 and 1
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
47
Build the model and obtain a static solution with prestress effects turned on [PSTRES,ON].The same
lumped mass setting [LUMPM] used here must also be used in the later prestress modal analysis.Chapter 2:
Structural Static Analysis describes the procedure to obtain a static solution. Use EMATWRITE,YES if you
want to look at strain energies from the modal analysis.
2.
Reenter SOLUTION and obtain the modal solution, also with prestress effects turned on (reissue
PSTRES,ON). Files Jobname.EMAT (if ANSYS creates it) and Jobname.ESAV from the static analysis
must be available. Hence, if another analysis is performed between the static and prestressed modal
analyses, the static analysis will need to be rerun. If the model is spinning, include spin-softening effects
(via the OMEGA command's KSPIN option) if necessary.
3.
Step 1 above can also be a transient analysis. In such a case, save the EMAT and ESAV files at the desired time
point.
If the deformed shape from the static solution differs significantly from its nondeformed shape, you can perform
a prestressed modal analysis of a large-deflection solution instead.
48
Stress-stiffening (SSTIF,ON) must be applied instead. (This requirement applies to elements outside of
the 18x family of elements only.)
The EMATWRITE,YES command is also necessary to write the element matrices to File.EMAT.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Note
You may also use one of the other eigensolvers (PSOLVE,EIGSYM, PSOLVE,EIGUNSYM,
PSOLVE,EIGDAMP or PSOLVE,EIGREDUC). See the PSOLVE documentation for details on when a
PSOLVE,TRIANG command must precede some PSOLVE,EIGxxx commands.
!
fini
!
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
49
!
cmrot, BrakeCM, ROTATX, ROTATY, ROTATZ
nsub, 1
solve
fini
!
/solu
/solu
antype,modal
!
! Use QR damp eigensolver
!
modopt,qrdamp
pstres,on
psolve,eigqrda
solve
fini
For further information, see Chapter 3: Surface-to-Surface Contact in the Contact Technology Guide.
[K ]{ i} = 2i [M]{ i}
where:
[K] = stiffness matrix
{i} = mode shape vector (eigenvector) of mode i
2
i = natural circular frequency of mode i ( i is the eigenvalue)
[M] = mass matrix
Many numerical methods are available to solve the above equation. ANSYS offers these methods:
50
Subspace method
Unsymmetric method
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Damped method (The damped method solves a different equation; see the Theory Reference for ANSYS
and ANSYS Workbench for more information.)
QR damped method (The QR damped method solves a different equation; see the Theory Reference for
ANSYS and ANSYS Workbench for more information.)
Note
The damped, unsymmetric, and QR damped methods are not available in the ANSYS Professional
program.
The first four methods (Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, subspace, and reduced) are the most commonly used.
Table 3.6,Symmetric System Eigensolver Choices compares these four mode-extraction methods. Following the
table is a brief description of each mode-extraction method.
Application
Memory
Required
Block Lanczos To find many modes (about 40+) of large models. Recommended Medium
when the model consists of poorly shaped solid and shell elements.This solver performs well when the model consists of
shells or a combination of shells and solids.Works faster but requires about 50% more memory than subspace.
PCG Lanczos To find few modes (up to about 100) of very large models
Medium
(500,000+ DOFs).This solver performs well when the lowest
modes are sought for models that are dominated by well-shaped
3-D solid elements (i.e., models that would typically be good
candidates for the PCG iterative solver for a similar static or full
transient analysis).
Subspace
To find few modes (up to about 40) of large models. RecommenLow
ded when the model consists of well-shaped solid and shell
elements. Works well if memory availability is limited.
Reduced
To find all modes of small to medium models (less than 10K
Low
DOF). Can be used to find few modes (up to about 40) of large
models with proper selection of master DOF, but accuracy of
frequencies depends on the master DOF selected.
Disk Required
Low
Low
High
Low
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
51
Large models that are dominated by 3-D solid elements and do not have ill-conditioned matrices due,
for example, to poorly shaped elements
Having ill-conditioned matrices or asking for many modes (e.g., more than 100 modes) can lead to an inefficient
solution time with this method.
The PCG Lanczos method finds only the lowest eigenvalues. If a range of eigenfrequencies is requested on the
MODOPT command, the PCG Lanczos method will find all of the eigenfrequencies below the lower value of the
eigenfrequency range as well as the number of requested eigenfrequencies in the given eigenfrequency range.
Thus the PCG Lanczos method is not recommended for problems when the lower value of the input eigenfrequency range is far from zero.
The PCG Lanczos method is the only eigenvalue solver that is optimized to run in a distributed manner in Distributed ANSYS.
52
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Note
The eigenvalue results reported by ANSYS are actually divided by 2* . This gives the frequency in
Hz (cycles/second). In other words:
Imaginary part of eigenvalue, as reported = /(2* )
Real part of eigenvalue, as reported = /(2* )
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
53
54
The total number of master DOF should be at least twice the number of modes of interest.
Choose master DOF in directions in which you expect the structure or component to vibrate. For a flat
plate, for example, you should choose at least a few masters in the out-of-plane direction (see Figure 3.2,
Choose Master DOF (a)). In cases where motion in one direction induces a significant motion in another
direction, choose master DOF in both directions (see Figure 3.2,Choose Master DOF (b)).
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
X
Y
UY
Z
UX
(a)
(b)
(a) Possible out-of-plane masters for a flat plate(b) Motion in X induces motion in Y
Choose masters at locations having relatively large mass or rotary inertia and relatively low stiffness (see
Figure 3.3,Choosing Master DOFs). Examples of such locations are overhangs and "loosely" connected
structures. Conversely, do not choose masters at locations with relatively small mass, or at locations with
high stiffness (such as DOF close to constraints).
ROTX
X
Z
UZ
(a)
UY
(b)
Choose masters at locations with (a) large rotary inertia, (b) large mass
If your primary interest is in bending modes, you can neglect rotational and "stretching" DOF.
If the degree of freedom to be chosen belongs to a coupled set, choose only the first (primary) DOF of
the coupled set.
Choose master DOF at locations where forces or nonzero displacements are to be applied.
For axisymmetric shell models (SHELL61 or SHELL208), choose as masters the global UX degree of freedom
at all nodes on those sections of the model that are parallel to or nearly parallel to the center line, so oscillatory motions between master DOF can be avoided (see Figure 3.4,Choosing Masters in an Axisymmetric
Shell Model).This recommendation can be relaxed if the motion is primarily parallel to the centerline. For
axisymmetric harmonic elements with MODE = 2 or greater, choose as masters both UX and UZ degrees
of freedom.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
55
The best way to check the validity of the master DOF set is to rerun the analysis with twice (or half ) the number
of masters and to compare the results. Another way is to review the reduced mass distribution printed during a
modal solution.The reduced mass should be, at least in the dominant direction of motion, within 10-15 percent
of the total mass of the structure.
56
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Solve the modal analysis. (ANSYS generates an .rmode file containing the residual vectors.)
7.
8.
Set up a mode-superposition transient or harmonic analysis, and include the previously calculated residual
vectors (RESVEC,ON).
Note
A load vector is also generated in Step 6 above. Be sure that you do not duplicate any loading.
9.
Solve the mode-superposition transient or harmonic analysis. ANSYS includes the residual vectors in
those calculations.
Specifying Pseudo-Constraints
If rigid body motion exists, specify only the minimum number of displacement constraints necessary to prevent
rigid body motion: three constraints (or fewer, depending on the element type) for 2-D models and six (or fewer)
for 3-D models.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
57
58
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Steady-state response
(forced vibrations)
response
F0
Forced harmonic
beam response
u - u0 cos (t + )
Transient response
(free vibrations)
time
(a)
(b)
Typical harmonic response system. Fo and are known. uo and are unknown (a). Transient
and steady-state dynamic response of a structural system (b).
Harmonic response analysis is a linear analysis. Some nonlinearities, such as plasticity will be ignored, even if
they are defined.You can, however, have unsymmetric system matrices such as those encountered in a fluidStructural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
59
It is easy to use, because you don't have to worry about choosing master degrees of freedom or mode
shapes.
It allows unsymmetric matrices, which are typical of such applications as acoustics and bearing problems.
It accepts all types of loads: nodal forces, imposed (nonzero) displacements, and element loads (pressures
and temperatures).
A disadvantage is that this method usually is more expensive than either of the other methods when you use
the frontal solver. However, when you use the JCG solver or the ICCG solver, the full method can be very efficient.
60
It is faster and less expensive compared to the full method when you are using the frontal solver.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
The initial solution calculates only the displacements at the master DOF. A second step, known as the
expansion pass, is required for a complete displacement, stress, and force solution. (However, the expansion
pass might be optional for some applications.)
All loads must be applied at user-defined master degrees of freedom. (This limits the use of solid-model
loads.)
It is faster and less expensive than either the reduced or the full method for many problems.
Element loads applied in the preceding modal analysis can be applied in the harmonic response analysis
via the LVSCALE command.
It allows solutions to be clustered about the structure's natural frequencies.This results in a smoother,
more accurate tracing of the response curve.
You can overcome any of these restrictions by performing a transient dynamic analysis, with harmonic loads
expressed as time-history loading functions. Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis describes the procedure for
a transient dynamic analysis.
61
3.
Both Young's modulus (EX) (or stiffness in some form) and density (DENS) (or mass in some form) must
be defined. Material properties may be linear, isotropic or orthotropic, and constant or temperature-dependent. Nonlinear material properties, if any, are ignored.
Only linear behavior is valid in a harmonic response analysis. Nonlinear elements, if any, will be treated
as linear elements. If you include contact elements, for example, their stiffnesses are calculated based on
their initial status and are never changed.
For a full harmonic response analysis, you can define frequency-dependent elastic material properties by
using TB,ELASTIC and TBFIELD; use TB,SDAMP and TBFIELD to define your structural damping coefficients.
SDAMP specifies damping in terms of the loss factor, which is equal to 2 times the damping ratio.
Note
Peak harmonic response occurs at forcing frequencies that match the natural frequencies of your
structure. Before obtaining the harmonic solution, you should first determine the natural frequencies
of your structure by obtaining a modal solution (as explained in Chapter 3: Modal Analysis).
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Full method
Reduced method
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
63
Amplitude
F0
Amplitude
Phase Angle
Real
2
F2
real + F imag
Freal = F0 cos
F0 =
Fimag = F0 sin
= tan-1 (Fmag/Freal)
The amplitude is the maximum value of the load, which you specify using the commands shown in Table 4.2,
Applicable Loads in a Harmonic Response Analysis.
The phase angle is a measure of the time by which the load lags (or leads) a frame of reference. On the complex
plane (see Figure 4.2,Relationship Between Real/Imaginary Components and Amplitude/Phase Angle), it is the
angle measured from the real axis.The phase angle is required only if you have multiple loads that are out of
phase with each other. For example, the unbalanced rotating antenna shown in Figure 4.3,An Unbalanced Rotating Antenna will produce out-of-phase vertical loads at its four support points.The phase angle cannot be
specified directly; instead, you specify the real and imaginary components of the out-of-phase loads using the
VALUE and VALUE2 fields of the appropriate displacement and force commands. Pressures and other surface
and body loads can only be specified with a phase angle of 0 (no imaginary component) with the following exceptions: nonzero imaginary components of pressures can be applied using the SURF153 and SURF154 elements
in a full harmonic response analysis, or using a mode superposition harmonic response analysis if the mode-extraction method is Block Lanczos or PCG Lanczos (see the SF and SFE commands).Figure 4.2,Relationship Between
Real/Imaginary Components and Amplitude/Phase Angle shows how to calculate the real and imaginary components.
The forcing frequency range is the frequency range of the harmonic load (in cycles/time). It is specified later as a
load step option with the HARFRQ command.
64
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
4-point support
Frame of
Reference
t
Elevation
(Frame of Reference)
FZ1 = Fo cos (t - 45 )
Plan
An unbalanced rotating antenna will produce out-of-phase vertical loads at its four support
points.
Note
A harmonic analysis cannot calculate the response to multiple forcing functions acting simultaneously
with different frequencies (for example, two machines with different rotating speeds running at the
same time). However, POST1 can superimpose multiple load cases to obtain the total response.
Table 4.2, Applicable Loads in a Harmonic Response Analysis summarizes the loads applicable to a to a harmonic
response analysis. Except for inertia loads, you can define loads either on the solid model (keypoints, lines, and
areas) or on the finite element model (nodes and elements). For a general discussion of solid-model loads versus
finite element loads, see Chapter 2: Loading in the Basic Analysis Guide.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
65
Category
Body Loads
Inertia Loads
Cmd Family
GUI Path
BF
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply>
Structural> Temperature
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply>
Structural> Other
Inertia
Apply
Delete
List
DK
DL
DA
D
FK
F
SFL
SFA
SF
DKDELE
DLDELE
DADELE
DDELE
FKDELE
FDELE
SFLDELE
SFADELE
SFDELE
DKLIST
DLLIST
DALIST
DLIST
FKLIST
FLIST
SFLLIST
SFALIST
SFLIST
SFE
SFEDELE
SFELIST
BFK
BFL
BFA
BFV
BF
BFKDELE
BFLDELE
BFADELE
BFVDELE
BFDELE
BFKLIST
BFLLIST
BFALIST
BFVLIST
BFLIST
BFE
BFEDELE BFELIST
ACEL,
OMEGA,
DOMEGA,
CGLOC,
CGOMGA,
DCGOMG
DSYM, DCUM
FCUM
SFGRAD
SFGRAD
SFGRAD,
SFCUM
SFSCALE SFGRAD, SFBEAM, SFFUN,
SFCUM
BFTRAN
BFTRAN
BFTRAN
BFTRAN
BFSCALE BFCUM ,
BFUNIF ,
TBUNIF
BFSCALE BFCUM
-
66
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Dynamics Options
Forcing Frequency Range
Damping
Command
NSUBST
KBC
GUI Path
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts>
Time/Frequenc> Freq and Substeps
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts>
Time/Frequenc> Time - Time Step or Freq and
Substeps
HARFRQ
Note
Surface and body loads do not ramp from their previous load step values, except for those
applied to SOLID45, SOLID92, and SOLID95 element types.The remaining element types always
ramp from zero or from the value specified via BFUNIF.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
67
Damping
Damping in some form should be specified; otherwise, the response will be infinity at the resonant frequencies.ALPHAD and BETAD result in a frequency-dependent damping ratio, whereas DMPRAT specifies
a constant damping ratio to be used at all frequencies. Damping can also be specified for individual materials using MP,DAMP and MP,DMPR. See Section 5.9.3: Damping for further details.
Note
If no damping is specified in a direct harmonic analysis (full or reduced), the program uses
zero damping by default.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
4.4.4.1. Postprocessors
You can review these results using either POST26 or POST1.The normal procedure is to first use POST26 to
identify critical forcing frequencies - frequencies at which the highest displacements (or stresses) occur at points
of interest in the model - and to then use POST1 to postprocess the entire model at these critical forcing frequencies.
POST1 is used to review results over the entire model at specific frequencies.
POST26 allows you to review results at specific points in the model over the entire frequency range.
Some typical postprocessing operations for a harmonic response analysis are explained below. For a complete
description of all postprocessing functions, see Chapter 4: An Overview of Postprocessing in the Basic Analysis
Guide.
Note
The NSOL command is for primary data (nodal displacements), the ESOL command for derived
data (element solution data, such as stresses), and the RFORCE command for reaction force
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
69
Graph the variables (versus frequency or any other variable).Then use PLCPLX to work with just the
amplitude, phase angle, real part, or imaginary part.
Command(s): PLVAR, PLCPLX
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> Graph
3.
Get a listing of the variable.To list just the extreme values, use the EXTREM command.Then use the
PRCPLX command to work with amplitude and phase angle or real and imaginary part.
Command(s): PRVAR, EXTREM, PRCPLX
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Variables> List Extremes
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Extremes
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> List
Many other functions, such as performing math operations among variables (in complex arithmetic), moving
variables into array parameters, moving array parameters into variables, etc., are available in POST26; see Chapter 6:
The Time-History Postprocessor (POST26) in the Basic Analysis Guide for details.
By reviewing the time-history results at strategic points throughout the model, you can identify the critical frequencies for further POST1 postprocessing.
Read in results for the desired harmonic solution.You can use the SET command for this purpose, but
it will read in either the real component or the imaginary component, not both at the same time.The
true magnitude of the results is given by an SRSS (square-root-of-sum-of-squares) combination of the
real and imaginary components (see Figure 4.2,Relationship Between Real/Imaginary Components and
Amplitude/Phase Angle) and can be done for specific points in the model in POST26.
2.
Display the deformed shape of the structure, contours of stresses, strains, etc., or vector plots of vector
items (PLVECT).To obtain tabular listings of data, use PRNSOL, PRESOL, PRRSOL, etc.
70
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Many other functions, such as mapping results on to a path, transforming results to different coordinate systems,
load case combinations, etc., are available in POST1; see Chapter 3: Solution in the Basic Analysis Guide for details.
See the Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, HROPT, HROUT, HARFRQ, DMPRAT, NSUBST,
KBC, NSOL, ESOL, RFORCE, PLCPLX, PLVAR, PRCPLX, PRVAR, PLDISP, PRRSOL, and PLNSOL commands.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
71
kc
k2
m1
m2
F1 sin t
Problem Sketch
MDOF
k1
kc
m1
2
1
k2
m2
3
3
4
5
2.
Type the text "Harmonic Response of Two-Mass-Spring System" and click on OK.
2.
3.
Scroll down the list on the left to "Combination" and select it.
4.
5.
Click on Apply.
6.
Scroll up the list on the left to "Structural Mass" and select it.
7.
8.
9.
72
1.
2.
Click on Add.The Element Type for Real Constants dialog box appears.
3.
4.
6.
7.
8.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> In Active CS.
2.
3.
4.
Click on Apply.
5.
6.
7.
Click on OK.
8.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Numbering.The Plot Numbering Controls dialog box
appears.
9.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Auto Numbered>
Thru Nodes. A picking menu appears.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Elem Attributes.
2.
3.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Auto Numbered>
Thru Nodes. A picking menu appears.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
73
6.
Click on Apply.
7.
4.5.3.7. Specify the Analysis Type, MDOF, and Load Step Specifications
1.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis.
2.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options.
4.
5.
Click once on "Amplitud + phase" to select the DOF printout format and click on OK.
6.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout.
8.
Click on "Last substep" to set the print frequency and click on OK.
9.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Freq and Substeps.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement> On
Nodes. A picking menu appears.
2.
3.
In the scroll box for DOFs to be constrained, click once on "UY" to highlight it (make sure no other selections are highlighted).
4.
Click on OK.
5.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement> On
Nodes. A picking menu appears.
6.
7.
8.
In the scroll box for DOFs to be constrained, click once on "UX" to highlight it and click once on "UY" to
deselect it.
9.
Click on OK.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Force/ Moment> On
Nodes. A picking menu appears.
11. In the graphics window, click once on node 2.
12. Click on OK.The Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears.
13. In the scroll box for direction of force/moment, click once on "FX."
14. Enter 200 for the real part of force/moment and click on OK.
74
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
2.
3.
Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution.
4.
When the solution is finished, a dialog box stating "Solution is done!" appears. Click on Close.
Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables.The Defined Time-History
Variables dialog box appears.
2.
3.
Click on OK to accept the default of Nodal DOF result.The Define Nodal Data dialog box appears.
4.
5.
6.
7.
In the scroll box on the right, click once on "Translation UX" to highlight it.
8.
Click on OK.
9.
Click on Add in the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box.The Add Time-History Variable dialog box
appears.
10. Click on OK to accept the default of Nodal DOF result.The Define Nodal Data dialog box appears.
11. Enter 3 for reference number of variable.
12. Enter 3 for node number.
13. Enter 3UX for the user-specified label.
14. In the scroll box on the right, click once on "Translation UX" to highlight it.
15. Click on OK.
16. Click on Close.
17. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Graphs.The Graph Controls dialog box appears.
18. In the scroll box for type of grid, scroll to "X and Y lines" to select it.
19. Click on OK.
20. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables.The Graph Time-History Variables
dialog box appears.Your graph should look like this:
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
75
2.
76
of a two-mass-spring system
! Spring element
! Spring element
! Mass element
! Mass element
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
! Store UX Displacements
! Turn grid on
! Y-axis label disp
! Display variables 2 and 3
2.
3.
4.
5.
Of these, the first step is the same as for the full method. Details of the other steps are explained below.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
77
Define the analysis type and options. Options for the reduced solution are the same as described for the
full method except for the following differences:
You can include prestress effects (PSTRES).This requires element files from a previous static (or
transient) analysis that also included prestress effects. See Section 4.10.1:Prestressed Harmonic Response
Analysis for details.
3.
Define master degrees of freedom. Master DOF are essential or dynamic degrees of freedom that characterize the dynamic behavior of the structure. For a reduced harmonic response dynamic analysis,
master DOF are also required at locations where you want to apply forces or nonzero displacements.
See Section 3.14: Matrix Reduction for guidelines to choose master DOF.
4.
Apply loads on the model. Harmonic loading is the same as described for the full method, except for the
following restrictions:
Only displacements and forces are valid. Element loads such as pressures, temperatures, and accelerations are not allowed.
5.
Specify load step options.These are the same as described for the full method except that the OUTRES
and ERESX commands are not available, and the constant material damping coefficient (MP,DMPR) is
not applicable for the reduced method.The OUTPR command controls the printout of the nodal solution
at the master DOF (OUTPR,NSOL,ALL (or NONE)).
6.
7.
8.
Repeat steps 4 through 7 for any additional loads and frequency ranges (that is, for additional load steps).
If you plan to do time-history postprocessing (POST26), the frequency ranges should not overlap from
one load step to the next. Another method for multiple load steps, which allows you to store the load
steps on files and then solve them at once using a macro, is described in the Basic Analysis Guide.
9.
Leave SOLUTION.
Command(s): FINISH
GUI: Close the Solution menu.
78
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Before defining the POST26 variables, use the FILE command to specify that data are to be read from
Jobname.RFRQ. For example, if HARMONIC is the jobname, the FILE command would be:FILE,HARMONIC,RFRQ. (By default, POST26 looks for a results file, which is not written by a reduced harmonic solution.)
Only nodal degree of freedom data (at master DOF) are available for processing, so you can use only the
NSOL command to define variables.
The .RFRQ, .TRI, .EMAT, and .ESAV files from the reduced solution must be available.
The database must contain the same model for which the reduced solution was calculated.
Note
You must explicitly leave SOLUTION (using the FINISH command) and reenter (/SOLU) before
performing the expansion pass.
2.
Activate the expansion pass and its options. ANSYS offers these options for the expansion pass:
Command
GUI Path
EXPASS
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> ExpansionPass
NUMEXP Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass>
Single Expand> Range of Solu's
Freq. Range for Expansion
NUMEXP Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass>
Singe Expand> Range of Solu's
Phase Angle for Expansion
HREXP
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass>
Singe Expand> Range of Solu's
Stress Calculations On/Off
NUMEXP, Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass>
EXPSOL
Singe Expand> Range of Solu's
Nodal Solution Listing Format HROUT
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options
79
3.
Specify load step options.The only options valid for a harmonic expansion pass are output controls:
Printed Output
Use this option to include any results data on the printed output file (Jobname.OUT).
Command(s): OUTPR
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout
Extrapolation of Results
Use this option to review element integration point results by copying them to the nodes instead of
extrapolating them (default).
Note
The FREQ field on OUTPR and OUTRES can be only ALL or NONE.
80
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
5.
Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 for additional solutions to be expanded. Each expansion pass is stored as a separate load step on the results file.
Caution
Subsequent spectrum analyses expect all expanded modes to be in one load step.
6.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
81
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Reenter SOLUTION
Expansion pass
Expand a single solution
Phase angle for expanded solution
See the Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, HROPT, HROUT, M, TOTAL, HARFRQ, DMPRAT,
NSUBST, KBC, FILE, NSOL, PLCPLX, PLVAR, PRCPLX, PRVAR, EXPASS, EXPSOL, HREXP, PLDISP, PRRSOL, and
PLNSOL commands.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Of these, the first step is the same as described for the full method.The remaining steps are described below.
82
The mode-extraction method should be Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, subspace, reduced, or QR damped.
(The other methods, unsymmetric and damped, do not apply to mode superposition.) If your model has
damping and/or an unsymmetric stiffness matrix, use the QR Damp mode-extraction method (MODOPT,QRDAMP).
Be sure to extract all modes that may contribute to the harmonic response.
For the reduced mode-extraction method, include those master degrees of freedom at which harmonic
loads will be applied.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
If you use the QR damped mode-extraction method, you must specify any damping (ALPHAD, BETAD,
MP,DAMP, or element damping including gyroscopic) that you want to include during preprocessing or
in the modal analysis. (ANSYS ignores damping specified during the mode superposition harmonic analysis.) You can set a constant damping ratio (DMPRAT), define constant material damping coefficients
(MP,DMPR), or define the damping ratio as a function of mode (MDAMP) in a modal superposition harmonic analysis.
If you need to apply harmonically varying element loads (pressures, temperatures, accelerations, and so
on), specify them in the modal analysis. ANSYS ignores the loads for the modal solution, but calculates a
load vector and writes it to the mode shape file (Jobname.MODE).You can then use the load vector for
the harmonic solution. Only forces, accelerations applied via the ACEL command, and the load vector
created in the modal analysis are valid. Use the LVSCALE command to apply both the real and imaginary
(if they exist) components of the load vector from the modal solution.
The modes need not be expanded for the mode superposition solution. (If you want to review mode
shapes, however, you must expand the mode shapes.)
Do not change the model data (for example, nodal rotations) between the modal and harmonic analyses.
Enter SOLUTION.
Command(s): /SOLU
GUI: Main Menu> Solution
2.
3.
Define the analysis type and analysis options.These are the same as described for the full method, except
for the following differences:
Specify the modes you want to use for the solution (HROPT).This determines the accuracy of the
harmonic solution. Generally, the number of modes specified should cover about 50 percent more
than the frequency range of the harmonic loads.
To include the contribution of higher frequency modes, add the residual vectors calculated in the
modal analysis (RESVEC,ON).
Optionally, cluster the solutions about the structure's natural frequencies (HROUT) for a smoother
and more accurate tracing of the response curve.
Optionally, at each frequency, print a summary table that lists the contributions of each mode to the
response (HROUT). Note, OUTPR,NSOL must be specified to print mode contributions at each frequency.
Apply loads on the model. Harmonic loading is the same as described for the full method, except for the
following restrictions:
Only forces, accelerations, and the load vector created in the modal analysis are valid. Use the LVSCALE
command to apply the load vector from the modal solution. Note that ALL loads from the modal
analysis are scaled, including forces and accelerations.To avoid load duplication, delete any loads
that were applied in the modal analysis.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
83
4.
If mode shapes from a reduced modal solution are being used, forces may be applied only at master
DOF.
Specify load step options.These are the same as described for the reduced method except that you can
also specify modal damping (MDAMP). In addition, if the QR damped method is specified, constant
material damping coefficients (MP,DMPR) can be defined.
The NSUBST command specifies the number of solutions on each side of a natural frequency if the
clustering option (HROUT) is chosen.The default is to calculate four solutions, but you can specify any
number of solutions from 2 through 20. (Any value over this range defaults to 10 and any value below
this range defaults to 4.)
5.
If you used the Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, or the subspace option for the modal analysis (MODOPT,LANB
or LANPCG or SUBSP), you may use a nodal component with the OUTRES,NSOL command to limit the
displacement data written to the reduced displacement file Jobname.RFRQ.The expansion pass will
only produce valid results for those nodes and for those elements in which all of the nodes of the elements
have been written to the .RFRQ file.To use this option, first suppress all writing by invoking
OUTRES,NSOL,NONE, then specify the item(s) of interest by invoking OUTRES,NSOL,ALL,component.
Repeat the OUTRES command for any additional nodal components that you want to write to the .RFRQ
file.
6.
7.
8.
Repeat steps 3 to 7 for any additional loads and frequency ranges (that is, for additional load steps). If
you plan to do time-history postprocessing (POST26), the frequency ranges should not overlap from one
load step to the next.
9.
Leave SOLUTION.
Command(s): FINISH
GUI: Close the Solution menu.
The mode superposition harmonic solution is written to the reduced displacement file,Jobname.RFRQ,regardless
of whether the subspace, Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, reduced, or QR damped method was used for the modal solution.
You will therefore need to expand the solution if you are interested in stress results.
84
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
! Jobname
! Title
! Enter PREP7
! Generate model
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Harmonic analysis
Mode superposition method; number of modes to use
Harmonic analysis output options; cluster option
Scale factor for loads from modal analysis
Nodal loads
Forcing frequency range
Damping ratio
Modal damping ratios
Number of harmonic solutions
Ramped or stepped loads
! Initiate solution
See the Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, MODOPT, M, TOTAL, HROPT, HROUT, LVSCALE,
F, HARFRQ, DMPRAT, MDAMP, NSUBST, KBC, FILE, NSOL, PLCPLX, PLVAR, EXPASS, EXPSOL, HREXP, SET,
and PLNSOL commands.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
85
Build the model and obtain a static solution with prestress effects turned on (PSTRES,ON).The procedure
to obtain the static solution is explained in Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis.
2.
Reenter SOLUTION and obtain the full harmonic solution, also with prestress effects turned on (reissue
PSTRES,ON). Files Jobname.EMAT and Jobname.ESAV from the static analysis must be available.
Hence, if another analysis is performed between the static and prestressed harmonic response analyses,
the static analysis will need to be rerun.
If thermal body forces were present during the static prestress analysis, these thermal body forces must
not be deleted during the full harmonic analysis or else the thermal prestress will vanish. Hence, any
temperature loads used to define the thermal prestress must also be used in the full harmonic response
analysis as sinusoidally time-varying temperature loads.You should be aware of this limitation and exercise
some judgement about whether or not to include temperature loads in their static prestress analysis.
Build the model and obtain a static solution with prestress effects turned on (PSTRES,ON).The procedure
to obtain the static solution is explained in Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis.
2.
Reenter SOLUTION and obtain the reduced harmonic solution, also with prestress effects turned on (reissue PSTRES,ON). Files Jobname.EMAT and Jobname.ESAV from the static analysis must be available.
Hence, if another analysis is performed between the static and prestressed harmonic response analyses,
the static analysis will need to be rerun.
86
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Analyze a simpler model first. A model of beams, masses, and springs can provide good insight into the
problem at minimal cost.This simpler model may be all you need to determine the dynamic response
of the structure.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
87
If you are including nonlinearities, try to understand how they affect the structure's response by doing
a static analysis first. In some cases, nonlinearities need not be included in the dynamic analysis.
3.
Understand the dynamics of the problem. By doing a modal analysis, which calculates the natural frequencies and mode shapes, you can learn how the structure responds when those modes are excited.
The natural frequencies are also useful for calculating the correct integration time step.
4.
For a nonlinear problem, consider substructuring the linear portions of the model to reduce analysis
costs. Substructuring is described in the Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide.
Note
If you do not want to include any nonlinearities, you should consider using one of the other methods
because the full method is also the most expensive method of the three.
The advantages of the full method are:
It is easy to use, because you do not have to worry about choosing master degrees of freedom or mode
shapes.
It accepts all types of loads: nodal forces, imposed (nonzero) displacements (although not recommended),
and element loads (pressures and temperatures) and allows tabular boundary condition specification via
TABLE type array parameters.
The main disadvantage of the full method is that it is more expensive than either of the other methods.
For procedural information about using the full method, see Section 5.3: Performing a Full Transient Dynamic
Analysis.
88
It is faster and less expensive than the reduced or the full method for many problems.
Element loads applied in the preceding modal analysis can be applied in the transient dynamic analysis
via the LVSCALE command.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
The time step must remain constant throughout the transient, so automatic time stepping is not allowed.
For procedural information about using the mode-superposition method, see Section 5.4: Performing a ModeSuperposition Transient Dynamic Analysis.
The initial solution calculates only the displacements at the master DOF. A second step, known as the
expansion pass, is required for a complete displacement, stress, and force solution. (However, the expansion
pass might not be needed for some applications.)
Element loads (pressures, temperatures, and so on) cannot be applied. Accelerations, however, are allowed.
All loads must be applied at user-defined master degrees of freedom. (This limits the use of solid-model
loads.)
The time step must remain constant throughout the transient, so automatic time stepping is not allowed.
For procedural information about using the reduced method, see Section 5.5: Performing a Reduced Transient
Dynamic Analysis.
2.
3.
4.
5.
89
Section 5.3.6: Save the Load Configuration for the Current Load Step
7.
8.
9.
Both Young's modulus (EX) (or stiffness in some form) and density (DENS) (or mass in some form) must
be defined. Material properties may be linear or nonlinear, isotropic or orthotropic, and constant or temperature-dependent.
The mesh should be fine enough to resolve the highest mode shape of interest.
Regions where stresses or strains are of interest require a relatively finer mesh than regions where only
displacements are of interest.
If you want to include nonlinearities, the mesh should be able to capture the effects of the nonlinearities.
For example, plasticity requires a reasonable integration point density (and therefore a fine element mesh)
in areas with high plastic deformation gradients.
If you are interested in wave propagation effects (for example, a bar dropped exactly on its end), the mesh
should be fine enough to resolve the wave. A general guideline is to have at least 20 elements per
wavelength along the direction of the wave.
90
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Load
Stepped (KBC,1)
3
Steady-state
analysis
1
4
2
Stepped (KBC,1)
5
(a)
Time
(b)
Time
The first load step you apply is usually to establish initial conditions.You then specify the loads and load step
options for the second and subsequent transient load steps. For each load step, you need to specify both load
values and time values, along with other load step options such as whether to step or ramp the loads, use
automatic time stepping, and so on.You then write each load step to a file and solve all load steps together. Establishing initial conditions is described below; the remaining tasks are described later in this chapter.
The first step in applying transient loads is to establish initial conditions (that is, the condition at Time = 0). A
transient dynamic analysis requires two sets of initial conditions (because the equations being solved are of
u
u
second order): initial displacement (uo) and initial velocity ( o ). If no special action is taken, both uo and o are
assumed to be zero. Initial accelerations ( o ) are always assumed to be zero, but you can specify nonzero initial
accelerations by applying appropriate acceleration loads over a small time interval.
The following paragraphs describe how to apply different combinations of initial conditions.
Zero initial displacement and zero initial velocity - These are the default conditions, that is, if uo = o = 0, you do
not need to specify anything.You may apply the loads corresponding to the first corner of the load-versus-time
curve in the first load step.
Nonzero initial displacement and/or nonzero initial velocity - You can set these initial conditions with the IC command.
Command(s): IC
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Initial Condit'n> Define
Caution
Be careful not to define inconsistent initial conditions. For instance, if you define an initial velocity
at a single DOF, the initial velocity at every other DOF will be 0.0, potentially leading to conflicting
initial conditions. In most cases, you will want to define initial conditions at every unconstrained DOF
in your model. If these conditions are not the same at every DOF, it is usually much easier to define
initial conditions explicitly, as documented below (rather than by using the IC command).
See the Commands Reference for a discussion of the TIMINT and IC commands.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
91
u o
= 0.25, you can apply a displacement of 0.001 over a time interval of 0.004, as shown below.
...
TIMINT,OFF
D,ALL,UY,.001
TIME,.004
LSWRITE
DDEL,ALL,UY
TIMINT,ON
...
!
!
!
!
!
!
Nonzero initial displacement and nonzero initial velocity - This is similar to the above case, except that the imposed
displacements are actual values instead of "small" values. For example, if uo = 1.0 and
a displacement of 1.0 over a time interval of 0.4:
...
TIMINT,OFF
D,ALL,UY,1.0
TIME,.4
LSWRITE
DDELE,ALL,UY
TIMINT,ON
...
!
!
!
!
!
!
Nonzero initial displacement and zero initial velocity - This requires the use of two substeps (NSUBST,2) with a step
change in imposed displacements (KBC,1). Without the step change (or with just one substep), the imposed
displacements would vary directly with time, leading to a nonzero initial velocity.The example below shows how
u
to apply uo = 1.0 and o = 0.0:
...
TIMINT,OFF
! Time integration effects off for static solution
D,ALL,UY,1.0
! Initial displacement = 1.0
TIME,.001
! Small time interval
NSUBST,2
! Two substeps
KBC,1
! Stepped loads
LSWRITE
! Write load data to load step file (Jobname.S01)
! Transient solution
TIMINT,ON
! Time-integration effects on for transient solution
TIME,...
! Realistic time interval
DDELE,ALL,UY
! Remove displacement constraints
KBC,0
! Ramped loads (if appropriate)
! Continue with normal transient solution procedures
...
Nonzero initial acceleration - This can be approximated by specifying the required acceleration (ACEL) over a
small interval of time. For example, the commands to apply an initial acceleration of 9.81 would look like this:
...
ACEL,,9.81
! Initial Y-direction acceleration
TIME,.001
! Small time interval
NSUBST,2
! Two substeps
KBC,1
! Stepped loads
! The structure must be unconstrained in the initial load step, or
! else the initial acceleration specification will have no effect.
DDELE, ...
! Remove displacement constraints (if appropriate)
LSWRITE
! Write load data to load step file (Jobname.S01)
! Transient solution
TIME, ...
! Realistic time interval
NSUBST, ...
! Use appropriate time step
KBC,0
! Ramped loads (if appropriate)
D, ...
! Constrain structure as desired
! Continue with normal transient solution procedures
92
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
See the Commands Reference for discussions of the ACEL, TIME, NSUBST, KBC, LSWRITE, DDELE, and KBC
commands.
When setting ANTYPE and NLGEOM, choose Small Displacement Transient if you are performing a
new analysis and you want to ignore large deformation effects such as large deflection, large rotation,
and large strain. Choose Large Displacement Transient if you expect large deflections (as in the case of
a long, slender bar under bending) or large strains (as in a metal-forming problem). Choose Restart Current
Analysis if you want to restart a failed nonlinear analysis, if you have previously completed a static prestress
or a full transient dynamic analysis and you want to extend the time-history, or if you wish to use the
Jobname.RSX information from a previous VT Accelerator run. Note that in a VT Accelerator run, you
cannot restart a job in the middle; you can only rerun the job from the beginning with changes in the input
parameters.
When setting AUTOTS, remember that this load step option (which is also known as time-step optimization
in a transient analysis) increases or decreases the integration time step based on the response of the
structure. For most problems, we recommend that you turn on automatic time stepping, with upper and
lower limits for the integration time step.These limits, specified using DELTIM or NSUBST, help to limit
the range of variation of the time step; see Section 5.9.2: Automatic Time Stepping for more information.
The default is ON.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
93
NSUBST and DELTIM are load step options that specify the integration time step for a transient analysis.
The integration time step is the time increment used in the time integration of the equations of motion.
You can specify the time increment directly or indirectly (that is, in terms of the number of substeps).The
time step size determines the accuracy of the solution: the smaller its value, the higher the accuracy.You
should consider several factors in order to calculate a "good" integration time step; see Section 5.9.1:
Guidelines for Integration Time Step for details.
Caution
By default, only the last substep (time-point) is written to the results file (Jobname.RST) in
a full transient dynamic analysis.To write all substeps, set the Frequency so that it writes all
of the substeps. Also, by default, only 1000 results sets can be written to the results file. If this
number is exceeded (based on your OUTRES specification), the program will terminate with
an error. Use the command /CONFIG,NRES to increase the limit (see Chapter 19: Memory
Management and Configuration in the Basic Analysis Guide).
Special considerations for setting these options in a full transient analysis include:
94
TIMINT is a dynamic load step option that specifies whether time integration effects are on or off.Time
integration effects must be turned on for inertia and damping effects to be included in the analysis (otherwise a static solution is performed), so the default is to include time integration effects.This option is
useful when beginning a transient analysis from an initial static solution; that is, the first load steps are
solved with the time integration effects off.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
ALPHAD (alpha, or mass, damping) and BETAD (beta, or stiffness, damping) are dynamic load step options
for specifying damping options. Damping in some form is present in most structures and should be included
in your analysis. See Section 5.3.4.2: Damping Option for other damping options.
TRNOPT (TINTOPT) specifies the time integration method to be used.The default is Newmark method.
TINTP is a dynamic load step option that specifies transient integration parameters.Transient integration
parameters control the nature of the Newmark and HHT time integration techniques.
Section 2.2.2.6: Using the Advanced NL Tab. Exception:You cannot use arc-length options in a full transient
analysis.
Additional solution options for a full transient analysis that differ from those for a static analysis, or have different
descriptions are presented in the following sections.
You may also use the NLHIST command to monitor results of interest in real time during solution. Before starting
the solution, you can request nodal data such as displacements or reaction forces at specific nodes.You can also
request element nodal data such as stresses and strains at specific elements to be graphed. Pair-based contact
data are also available.The result data are written to a file named Jobname.nlh.
For example, a reaction force-deflection curve could indicate when possible buckling behavior occurs. Nodal
results and contact results are monitored at every converged substep while element nodal data are written as
specified via the OUTRES setting.
You can also track results during batch runs.To execute, either access the ANSYS Launcher and select File
Tracking from the Tools menu, or type nlhist110 at the command line. Use the supplied file browser to
navigate to your Jobname.nlh file, and click on it to invoke the tracking utilty.You can use this utilty to read
the file at any time, even after the solution is complete.
To use this option, use either of these methods:
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
95
96
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
5.3.6. Save the Load Configuration for the Current Load Step
As described in Section 5.3.2: Establish Initial Conditions, you need to apply loads and save the load configuration
to a load step file for each corner of the load-versus-time curve.You may also want to have an additional load
step that extends past the last time point on the curve to capture the response of the structure after the transient
loading.
Command(s): LSWRITE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
97
5.3.11.1. Postprocessors
You can review these results using either POST26, which is the time-history postprocessor, or POST1, which is
the general postprocessor.
POST26 is used to review results at specific points in the model as functions of time.
POST1 is used to review results over the entire model at specific time points.
Some typical postprocessing operations for a transient dynamic analysis are explained below. For a complete
description of all postprocessing functions, see Section 4.1: Postprocessors Available in the Basic Analysis Guide.
Note
In the mode-superposition or reduced methods, only static force is available with the FORCE
command.
2.
Graph or list the variables. By reviewing the time-history results at strategic points throughout the
model, you can identify the critical time points for further POST1 postprocessing.
Command(s): PLVAR (graph variables) PRVAR, EXTREM (list variables)
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Variables
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Extremes
98
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
2.
Read in the desired set of results. Use the SET command to identify the data set by load step and substep
numbers or by time.
Command(s): SET
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> By Time/Freq
3.
Perform the necessary POST1 operations.The typical POST1 operations that you perform for a transient
dynamic analysis are the same as those that you perform for a static analysis. See Section 2.2.6.4: Typical
Postprocessing Operations for a list of these operations.
Note
If you specify a time for which no results are available, the results that are stored will be a
linear interpolation between the two nearest time points.
! Jobname
! Title
! Enter PREP7
99
!
!
!
!
!
!
/POST1
SET,...
!
PLDISP,...
!
PRRSOL,...
!
PLNSOL,...
!
PRERR
!
-----! Other postprocessing as
--FINISH
See the Commands Reference for discussions of the ANTYPE, TRNOPT, ALPHAD, BETAD, KBC, TIME, AUTOTS,
DELTIM, OUTRES, LSWRITE, LSSOLVE, SOLU, NSOL, ESOL, RFORCE, PLVAR, PRVAR, PLDISP, PRRSOL, PLNSOL,
and PRERR commands.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The mode-extraction method should be Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, reduced, subspace, or QR damped.
(The other methods, unsymmetric and damped, do not apply to mode-superposition .) If your model has
damping and/or an unsymmetric stiffness matrix, use the QR Damp mode-extraction method (MODOPT,QRDAMP).
Be sure to extract all modes that may contribute to the dynamic response.
For the reduced mode-extraction method, include those master degrees of freedom at those nodes at
which forces and gap conditions are to be defined.
100
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
If you use the QR damped mode-extraction method, you must specify any damping (ALPHAD, BETAD,
MP,DAMP, or element damping including gyroscopic) that you want to include during preprocessing or
in the modal analysis. (ANSYS ignores damping specified during the mode-superposition harmonic analysis.) You can set a constant damping ratio (DMPRAT) or define the damping ratio as a function of mode
(MDAMP) in a modal superposition harmonic analysis. Note that constant material damping coefficient
(MP,DMPR) is not applicable in transient analysis.
Specify displacement constraints, if any.These constraints will be ignored if they are specified in the modesuperposition transient solution instead of in the modal solution.
If you need to apply element loads (pressures, temperatures, accelerations, and so on) in the transient
dynamic analysis, you must specify them in the modal analysis.The loads are ignored for the modal
solution, but a load vector will be calculated and written to the mode shape file (Jobname.MODE).You
can then use this load vector for the transient solution.
The modes need not be expanded for the mode-superposition solution. (If you want to review mode
shapes from a reduced modal solution, however, you must expand the mode shapes.)
The model data (for example, nodal rotations) should not be changed between the modal and transient
analyses.
The residual vector file (Jobname.RMODE) if residual vectors are taken into account (RESVEC).
The database must contain the same model for which the modal solution was obtained.
Enter SOLUTION.
Command(s): /SOLU
GUI: Main Menu> Solution
2.
Define the analysis type and analysis options.These are the same as the analysis options described for
the full method (in Section 5.3.3: Set Solution Controls and Section 5.3.4: Set Additional Solution Options),
except for the following differences:
You cannot use the Solution Controls dialog box to define analysis type and analysis options for a
mode-superposition transient analysis. Instead, you must set them using the standard set of ANSYS
solution commands (which are listed in Section 5.3.3: Set Solution Controls and Section 5.3.4: Set Additional Solution Options) and the standard corresponding menu paths.
When you specify a mode-superposition transient analysis, a Solution menu appropriate for the
specified analysis type appears.The Solution menu will be either abridged or unabridged, depending on the actions you took prior to this step in your ANSYS session.The abridged menu contains
only those solution options that are valid and/or recommended for mode-superposition transient
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
101
3.
Specify the number of modes you want to use for the solution (TRNOPT).This determines the accuracy
of the transient solution. At a minimum, you should use all modes that you think will contribute to
the dynamic response. If you expect higher frequencies to be excited, for example, the number of
modes specified should include the higher modes.The default is to use all modes calculated in the
modal solution.
To include the contribution of higher frequency modes, add the residual vectors calculated in the
modal analysis (RESVEC,ON).
If you do not want to use rigid body (0 frequency) modes, use MINMODE on the TRNOPT command
to skip over them.
Define gap conditions, if any.They can only be defined between two master degree of freedom (DOF)
nodes or between master DOF nodes and ground. When a non-reduced mode-extraction method is
used, a master DOF implies an unconstrained, active DOF. If you used the QR damped mode-extraction
method, gap conditions are not supported. More details about gap conditions are presented in Section 5.5.1.3.1: Gap Conditions.
Command(s): GP
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Dynamic Gap Cond> Define
4.
Apply loads to the model.The following loading restrictions apply in a mode-superposition transient
dynamic analysis:
Only nodal forces (F) and accelerations applied via the ACEL command are available.
A load vector created in the modal analysis can be included via the LVSCALE command (Main Menu>
Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Load Vector> For Mode Super) to apply the load vector from
the modal solution.You can use such a load vector to apply element loads (pressures, temperatures,
and so on) on the model. If you use LVSCALE, ensure that all nodal forces (F) defined in the modal
analysis solution are removed in the transient analysis. Generally, you should apply nodal forces in
the transient part of the analysis.
If mode shapes from a reduced modal solution are being used, forces may be applied only at master
DOF.
Multiple load steps are usually required to specify the load history in a transient analysis.The first load
step is used to establish initial conditions, and second and subsequent load steps are used for the transient loading, as explained next.
5.
Establish initial conditions. In modal superposition transient analyses, a first solution is done at TIME =
0.This establishes the initial condition and time step size for the entire transient analysis. Generally, the
only load applicable for the first load step is initializing nodal forces. For this pseudo-static analysis, the
mode-superposition method may yield poor results at TIME = 0 if nonzero loads are applied.
The following load step options are available for the first load step:
102
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Table 5.2 Options for the First Load Step: Mode-Superposition Analysis
Option
Dynamics Options
Transient Integration
Parameters
Damping
General Options
Integration Time Step
Command
TINTP
ALPHAD,
BETAD, DMPRAT, MP,
MDAMP
DELTIM
GUI Path
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc>
Time Integration
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc>
Damping
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Change
Mat Props> Material Models> Structural> Damping
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc>
Time-Time Step
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls>
Solu Printout
Damping
Damping in some form is present in most structures and should be included in your analysis.You
can specify five forms of damping in a mode-superposition transient dynamic analysis:
Alpha (mass) damping (ALPHAD)
Beta (stiffness) damping (BETAD)
Constant damping ratio (DMPRAT)
Material-dependent beta damping (MP,DAMP)
Modal damping (MDAMP)
Remember that, as described earlier in Section 5.4.2: Obtain the Modal Solution, any damping
that you specify in the mode-superposition transient analysis is ignored if you used the QR
damped mode-extraction method. Constant material damping coefficient (MP,DMPR) is not
applicable in transient analysis. See Section 5.9.3: Damping for further details.
The only valid general option for the first load step is integration time step (DELTIM), which is assumed
to be constant throughout the transient. By default, the integration time step is assumed to be 1/(20f),
where f is the highest frequency chosen for the solution.The DELTIM command is valid only in the
first load step and is ignored in subsequent load steps.
Note
If you do issue the TIME command in the first load step, it will be ignored.The first solution
is always a static solution at TIME = 0.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
103
6.
The output control option for the first load step is printed output (OUTPR). Use this option to control
printout of the displacement solution at the master DOF.
Specify loads and load step options for the transient loading portion.
The only valid label on these commands is NSOL (nodal solution).The default for OUTRES is to write
the solution for every fourth time-point to the reduced displacement file (unless there are gap conditions defined, in which case the default is to write every solution).
7.
If you used the Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, or subspace options for the modal analysis (MODOPT,LANB
or MODOPT,LANPCG or MODOPT,SUBSP), you may use a nodal component with the OUTRES,NSOL
command to limit the displacement data written to the reduced displacement file Jobname.RDSP.The
expansion pass will only produce valid results for those nodes and for those elements in which all of the
nodes of the elements have been written to the .RDSP file.To use this option, first suppress all writing
by invoking OUTRES,NSOL,NONE, then specify the item(s) of interest by invoking
OUTRES,NSOL,FREQ,COMP. Repeat the OUTRES command for any additional nodal components that
you want to write to the .RDSP file. Only one output frequency is allowed - ANSYS uses the last frequency
specified by OUTRES.
8.
9.
Leave SOLUTION.
Command(s): FINISH
GUI: Close the Solution menu.
Note
As an alternative method of resolution, you can issue the LSWRITE command to write each load
step to a load step file (Jobname.S01) and then issue LSSOLVE to start the transient solution.
The mode-superposition transient solution is written to the reduced displacement file,Jobname.RDSP,regardless
of whether the subspace, Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, reduced, or QR damped method was used for the modal solution.
You will therefore need to expand the solution if you are interested in stress results.
104
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
! Jobname
! Title
! Enter PREP7
105
!
!
!
!
Reenter SOLUTION
Expansion pass
No. of solutions to expand; time range
Results-file data controls
See the Commands Reference for discussions of the ANTYPE, MODOPT, M, TOTAL, ACEL, TRNOPT, LVSCALE,
MDAMP, DELTIM, TIME, KBC, OUTRES, LSSOLVE, FILE, SOLU, NSOL, PLVAR, PRVAR, EXPASS, NUMEXP,
OUTRES, PLDISP, PRRSOL, PLNSOL, and PRERR commands.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Of these, the first step is the same as for the full method, except that no nonlinearities are allowed (other than
simple node-to-node contact, which is specified in the form of a gap condition instead of an element type). Details
of the other steps are explained below.
106
You cannot use the Solution Controls dialog box to define analysis type and analysis options for a reduced
transient dynamic analysis. Instead, you must set them using the standard set of ANSYS solution commands
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
When you specify a reduced transient analysis, a Solution menu that is appropriate for that specific type
of analysis appears.The Solution menu will be either abridged or unabridged, depending on the actions
you took prior to this step in your ANSYS session.The abridged menu contains only those solution options
that are valid and/or recommended for reduced transient analyses. If you are on the abridged Solution
menu and you want to access other solution options (that is, solution options that are valid for you to use,
but their use may not be encouraged for this type of analysis), select the Unabridged Menu option from
the Solution menu. For details, see Section 3.4.1: Using Abridged Solution Menus in the Basic Analysis Guide.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
107
Gaps between
master node pairs
Gaps between
master nodes
and ground
(b)
(a)
Gap conditions are similar to gap elements and are specified between surfaces that are expected to contact
(impact) each other during the transient.The ANSYS program accounts for the gap force, which develops when
the gap closes, by using an equivalent nodal load vector.
Some guidelines to define gap conditions are presented below:
Use enough gap conditions to obtain a smooth contact stress distribution between the contacting surfaces.
Define a reasonable gap stiffness. If the stiffness is too low, the contacting surfaces may overlap too much.
If the stiffness is too high, a very small time step will be required during impact. A general recommendation
is to specify a gap stiffness that is one or two orders of magnitude higher than the adjacent element
stiffness.You can estimate the adjacent element stiffness using AE/L, where A is the contributing area
around the gap condition, E is the elastic modulus of the softer material at the interface, and L is the depth
of the first layer of elements at the interface.
The nonlinear gap damping provided through the DAMP field of the GP command runs faster than a full
transient analysis using a gap element COMBIN40. Only TRNOPT = MSUP allows the nonlinear gap
damping action. Damping conditions are ignored for the reduced transient analysis method.
Only displacements, forces, and translational accelerations (such as gravity) are valid. Acceleration loading
is not allowed if the model contains any master DOF at any nodes with rotated nodal coordinate systems.
As mentioned for the full method, multiple load steps are usually required to specify the load history in a transient
analysis.The first load step is used to establish initial conditions, and second and subsequent load steps are used
for the transient loading, as explained next.
Establish initial conditions.The only initial condition that may be explicitly established is the initial dis-
placement (uo); that is, initial velocity and acceleration must be zero ( o = 0, o = 0). Displacements
cannot be deleted in subsequent load steps, therefore they cannot be used to specify an initial velocity.
In a reduced transient analysis, a static solution is always performed as the first solution, using the loads
given, to determine uo.
108
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Specify load step options for the first load step.Valid options appear in Table 5.3,Options for the First Load
Step-Reduced Analysis.
GUI Path
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time Integration
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Damping
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other>
Change Mat Props> Material Models> Structural>
Damping
General Options
Integration Time Step
DELTIM
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time- Time Step
OUTPR
Damping
Damping in some form is present in most structures and should be included in your analysis.You can
specify four forms of damping in a reduced transient dynamic analysis:
Note
If you do issue the TIME command for the first load step, it will be ignored.The first solution is always
a static solution at TIME = 0.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
109
General Options
Time (specifies the time at the end of the load step) (TIME)
Output Controls
The only valid label on these commands is NSOL (nodal solution).The default for OUTRES is to write the
solution for every fourth time-point to the reduced displacement file (unless there are gap conditions
defined, in which case the default is to write every solution).
110
Before defining the POST26 variables, use the FILE command (Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings>
File) to specify that data are to be read from Jobname.RDSP. For example, if the jobname is TRANS, the
FILE command would be:FILE,TRANS,RDSP. (By default, POST26 looks for a results file, which is not written
by a reduced transient solution.)
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Only nodal degree of freedom data (at master DOF) are available for processing, so you can use only the
NSOL command to define variables.
Note
An expansion pass is not always required. For instance, if you are interested mainly in displacements
at specific points on the structure, then the reduced solution could satisfy your requirements. However,
if you want to determine displacements at non-master DOF, or if you are interested in the stress or
force solution, then you must perform an expansion pass.
The .RDSP, .EMAT, .ESAV, .DB, and .TRI files from the reduced solution must be available.
The database must contain the same model for which the reduced solution was calculated.
Reenter SOLUTION.
Command(s): /SOLU
GUI: Main Menu> Solution
Note
You must explicitly leave SOLUTION (using the FINISH command) and reenter (/SOLU) before
performing the expansion pass.
2.
Command
EXPASS
EXPSOL
GUI Path
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> ExpansionPass
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Range of Solu's
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single Expand> By Time/Freq
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
111
3.
Specify load step options.The only options valid for a transient dynamic expansion pass are output
controls:
Output Controls
Note
The FREQ field on OUTPR and OUTRES can only be ALL or NONE. ERESX allows you to
review element integration point results by copying them to the nodes instead of extrapolating them (default).
4.
5.
Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 for additional solutions to be expanded. Each expansion pass is stored as a separate load step on the results file.
6.
Leave SOLUTION.
Command(s): FINISH
GUI: Close the Solution window.
112
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
113
Expansion Pass
/2
MDOF
20.
L.S.2
2
X
L.S.3
2 m
F(t)
L.S.1
0.075
Problem Model
Time, sec
0.100
0.092
Force-Time History
2.
Enter the text "Transient response to a constant force with a finite rise time."
3.
Click on OK.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete.The Element Types
dialog box appears.
2.
3.
4.
In the right scroll box, click on "2D elastic 3," and click on Apply.
5.
6.
In the right scroll box, click on "3D mass 21," and click on OK.
7.
In the Element Types dialog box, click once on "Type 2," and click on Options.
8.
In the scroll box for Rotary inertia options, scroll to "2D w/o rot iner" and select it.
9.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants> Add/Edit/Delete.The Real Constants
dialog box appears.
2.
Click on Add.The Element Type for Real Constants dialog box appears.
3.
Click on Type1 BEAM3 then Click on OK.The Real Constants for BEAM3 dialog box appears.
4.
5.
Click on OK.
114
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
7.
Click on Type 2 MASS21 and click on OK.The Real Constant Set Number 2, for MASS21 dialog box appears.
8.
9.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models.The Define Material Model Behavior dialog box appears.
2.
In the Material Models Available window, double-click on the following options: Structural, Linear,
Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears.
3.
Enter 30e3 for EX (Young's modulus), enter 0.3 for PRXY, and click on OK. Material Model Number 1 appears
in the Material Models Defined window on the left.
4.
Choose menu path Material> Exit to remove the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> In Active CS.The Create
Nodes in Active Coordinate System dialog box appears.
2.
Enter 1 for node number and click on Apply to define node 1 at 0,0,0.
3.
4.
5.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> Fill between Nds.The
Fill between Nds picking menu appears.
6.
Click once on nodes 1 and 3 in the ANSYS Graphics window, and click on OK in the picking menu.The
Create Nodes Between 2 Nodes dialog box appears.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Auto Numbered>
Thru Nodes.The Elements from Nodes picking menu appears.
2.
3.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Elem Attributes.The
Element Attributes dialog box appears.
5.
6.
In the Real constant set number drop down menu, select 2 and click OK.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Auto Numbered>
Thru Nodes.The Elements from Nodes picking menu appears.
8.
9.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
115
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis.
2.
Click on "Transient" to select it, and click on OK.The Transient Analysis dialog box appears.
3.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options.The Reduced Transient
Analysis dialog box appears.
5.
6.
Click on OK.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected> Define.The Define Master
DOFs picking menu appears.
2.
Click on node 2 and click on OK.The Define Master DOFs dialog box appears.
3.
In the drop down menu for 1st degree of freedom, select "UY."
4.
Click on OK.
Choose the menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time-Time Step.
The Time and Time Step Options dialog box appears.
2.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement> On
Nodes.The Apply U,ROT on Nodes picking menu appears.
2.
Click on node 1 and click on Apply.The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
3.
Click on "UY" to select it and click on Apply.The Apply U,ROT on Nodes picking menu appears.
4.
Click on node 3, and click on OK.The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears.
5.
Click on "UX" to select it. "UY" should remain selected. Click on OK.
6.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Force/Moment> On
Nodes.The Apply F/M on Nodes picking menu appears.
7.
Click on node 2 and click on OK.The Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears.
8.
In the drop down menu for Direction of force/mom, select "FY." Leave the value as blank (zero) for the
initial static solution.
9.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results File.The
Controls for Database and Results File Writing dialog box appears.
2.
116
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
2.
3.
Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc>Time-Time Step.The
Time and Time Step Options dialog box appears.
2.
Enter .075 for Time at end of load step and click on OK.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Force/Moment> On
Nodes.The Apply F/M on Nodes picking menu appears.
4.
Click on node 2 and click on OK.The Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears.
5.
2.
3.
Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time-Time Step.The
Time and Time Step Options dialog box appears.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution.
6.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> ExpansionPass. Set the Expansion pass
radio button to On and click on OK.
2.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single Expand> By
Time/Freq.The Expand Single Solution by Time/Frequency dialog box appears.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
117
Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> File.The File Settings dialog box appears.
2.
Click browse and select "file.rdsp" and click on open then OK.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables.The Defined Time-History
Variables dialog box appears.
4.
5.
Click on OK to accept the default of Nodal DOF result.The Define Nodal Data picking menu appears. Pick
node 2 and click OK.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. Click on OK, then click on Close in the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box.
11. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables.
12. Enter 2 for 1st variable to graph and click on OK.The graph appears in the ANSYS Graphics window.
13. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Variables.
14. Enter 2 for 1st variable to list and click on OK.
15. Review the information in the status window and click on Close.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set.
2.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape.The Plot Deformed
Shape dialog box appears.
3.
2.
118
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
/SOLU
ANTYPE,TRANS
TRNOPT,REDUC,,NODAMP
DELTIM,.004
D,1,UY
D,3,UX,,,,,UY
OUTPR,BASIC,1
OUTRES,ALL,1
F,2,FY,0
SOLVE
TIME,.075
F,2,FY,20
SOLVE
TIME,.1
SOLVE
FINISH
! Force = 0 at Time = 0
! Time at end of load step
! Force is ramped to 20
! Constant force until time = 0.1
/SOLU
! The following is the expansion pass using BEAM3 and MASS21 elements
EXPASS,ON
! Expansion pass on
EXPSOL,,,0.092
! Time of maximum response
SOLVE
FINISH
/POST26
NUMVAR,0
FILE,file,rdsp
NSOL,2,2,U,Y,NSOL
PLVAR,2
PRVAR,2
FINISH
/POST1
SET,FIRST
PLDISP,1
FINISH
! Read in results
! Display deformed and undeformed shape
Build your model, enter SOLUTION, and define a transient analysis type (ANTYPE,TRANS).
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
119
For all subsequent load steps, turn time integration effects on (TIMINT,ON), and proceed using the full
transient dynamic analysis procedures described previously. Once all load steps are written to files
(LSWRITE), you can initiate the multiple load step solution (LSSOLVE).
Note
If you intend to define initial conditions (IC), perform the static prestress solution as a separate
solution.To activate the gyroscopic damping matrix in a prestressed transient analysis, perform a
separate static solution with Coriolis effects activated (CORIOLIS,ON,,,ON) in a stationary reference
frame.
(Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Initial Condit'n> Define)
The IC command is valid only in the first load step.
Build the model and obtain a static solution with prestress effects turned on (PSTRES,ON).The procedure
to obtain a static solution is explained in Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis.
2.
Reenter SOLUTION (/SOLU) and obtain the reduced transient solution, also with prestress effects turned
on (PSTRES,ON). Files Jobname.DB, Jobname.EMAT, and Jobname.ESAV from the static analysis
must be available. Hence, if another analysis is performed between the static and the prestressed reduced
transient dynamic analyses, the static analysis will need to be rerun.
120
Resolve the response frequency.The time step should be small enough to resolve the motion (response)
of the structure. Since the dynamic response of a structure can be thought of as a combination of modes,
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
8
7
6
5
4
3
recommended
2
1
0
20
40
60
80
10
30
50
70
Number of Time Steps Per Cycle
90
100
For the HHT time integration method, the same guidelines for time step should be applied. Note that if
the same time step and time integration parameters are used, the HHT method will be more accurate
compared to the Newmark method.
An alternative way to select time step size is to use the midstep residual criterion. When this criterion is
used, the response frequency criterion is disabled by default.You have the option to enable the response
frequency criterion along with the midstep residual criterion (see item 6 below).
2.
Resolve the applied load-versus-time curve(s).The time step should be small enough to follow the
loading function.The response tends to lag the applied loads, especially for stepped loads, as shown in
Figure 5.5,Transient Input vs.Transient Response. Stepped loads require a small ITS at the time of the
step change so that the step change can be closely followed. ITS values as small as 1/180f may be needed
to follow stepped loads.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
121
3.
Resolve the contact frequency. In problems involving contact (impact), the time step should be small
enough to capture the momentum transfer between the two contacting surfaces. Otherwise, an apparent
energy loss will occur and the impact will not be perfectly elastic.The integration time step can be determined from the contact frequency (fc) as:
ITS=1/Nfc
fc =(1/ 2) k /m
where k is the gap stiffness, m is the effective mass acting at the gap, and N is the number of points per
cycle.To minimize the energy loss, at least thirty points per cycle of (N = 30) are needed. Larger values
of N may be required if acceleration results are needed. For the reduced and mode-superposition
methods, N must be at least 7 to ensure stability.
You can use fewer than thirty points per cycle during impact if the contact period and contact mass are
much less than the overall transient time and system mass, because the effect of any energy loss on the
total response would be small.
4.
Resolve the wave propagation. If you are interested in wave propagation effects, the time step should
be small enough to capture the wave as it travels through the elements. See Section 5.3.1: Build the
Model for a discussion of element size.
5.
Resolve the nonlinearities. For most nonlinear problems, a time step that satisfies the preceding guidelines
is sufficient to resolve the nonlinearities.There are a few exceptions, however: if the structure tends to
stiffen under the loading (for example, large deflection problems that change from bending to membrane
load-carrying behavior), the higher frequency modes that are excited will have to be resolved.
6.
Satisfy the time step accuracy criterion. Satisfaction of the dynamics equations at the end of each time
step ensures the equilibrium at these discrete points of time.The equilibrium at the intermediate time
is usually not satisfied. If the time step is small enough, it can be expected that the intermediate state
should not deviate too much from the equilibrium. On the other hand, if the time step is large, the intermediate state can be far from the equilibrium.The midstep residual norm provides a measure of the
accuracy of the equilibrium for each time step.You can use the MIDTOL command to choose this criterion.
See the MIDTOL command description for suggested tolerance values. See also Section 15.7.7: Midstep
Residual for Structural Dynamic Analysis in the Theory Reference for ANSYS and ANSYS Workbench.
After calculating the time step using the appropriate guidelines, use the minimum value for your analysis. By
using automatic time stepping, you can let the ANSYS program decide when to increase or decrease the time
step during the solution. Automatic time stepping is discussed next.
122
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
5.9.3. Damping
Caution
Avoid using exceedingly small time steps, especially when establishing initial conditions. Exceedingly
small numbers can cause numerical difficulties. Based on a problem time scale of unity, for example,
time steps smaller than 10-10 could cause numerical difficulties.
Problems that have only localized dynamic behavior (for example, turbine blade and hub assemblies),
where the low-frequency energy content of part of the system may dominate the high-frequency areas
Problems that are constantly excited (for example, seismic loading), where the time step tends to change
continually as different frequencies are excited
Kinematics (rigid-body motion) problems, where the rigid-body contribution to the response frequency
term may dominate
5.9.3. Damping
Damping is present in most systems and should be specified in a dynamic analysis.The following forms of
damping are available in the ANSYS program:
Material-Dependent Damping
Modal Damping
Element Damping
Only the constant damping ratio and modal damping are available in the ANSYS Professional program.You can
specify more than one form of damping in a model.The program will formulate the damping matrix (C) as the
sum of all the specified forms of damping.The constant material damping coefficient is only applicable in full
and modal harmonic analyses.
Table 5.5,Damping for Different Analysis Types shows the types of damping available for different structural
analyses.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
123
Analysis
Type
Static
Modal
Undamped
Damped
Harmonic
Full
Reduced
Mode Sup
Transient
Full
Reduced
Mode Sup
Spectrum
SPRS, MPRS(2)
DDAM(2)
PSD
Buckling
Substructure
Constant MaElement
terial DampDamping(3) ing CoeffiCOMBIN7, cient MP,DMand so on
PR
N/A
N/A
No(5)
Yes
No(5)
Yes
No(5)
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No(7)
Yes
Yes
Yes(6)
Yes
Yes
Yes(4,6)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes(6)
Yes
No
Yes(7)
Yes
Yes
Yes(6)
Yes
Yes
Yes(4,6)
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes(6)
No
No
No
Yes(1)
Yes(1)
Yes
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes(4)
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
No
No
No
No
N/A
Yes
No
No
No
N/A
No
2.
Damping is used only for mode combination and not for computation of mode coefficients
3.
4.
5.
6.
The QR damped eigensolver supports damping that may be present in the system (applied via the various
damping specification methods available in ANSYS). However, the damping must be applied in the
modal analysis portion of the mode-superposition analysis.
7.
Only the QR damped method supports the constant material damping coefficient application in a
downstream mode-superposition harmonic analysis
Alpha damping and Beta damping are used to define Rayleigh damping constants and . The damping matrix
(C) is calculated by using these constants to multiply the mass matrix (M) and stiffness matrix (K):
(C) = (M) + (K)
The ALPHAD and BETAD commands are used to specify and , respectively, as decimal numbers. The values
of and are not generally known directly, but are calculated from modal damping ratios, i. i is the ratio of
actual damping to critical damping for a particular mode of vibration, i. If i is the natural circular frequency of
mode i, and satisfy the relation
124
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
5.9.3. Damping
i = /2i + i/2
In many practical structural problems, alpha damping (or mass damping) may be ignored ( = 0). In such cases,
you can evaluate from known values of i and i, as
= 2 i/i
Only one value of can be input in a load step, so choose the most dominant frequency active in that load step
to calculate .
To specify both and for a given damping ratio , it is commonly assumed that the sum of the and terms
is nearly constant over a range of frequencies (see Figure 5.6,Rayleigh Damping). Therefore, given and a frequency range i to j, two simultaneous equations can be solved for and .
Total
Damping Ratio,
-damping
-damping
1
Alpha damping can lead to undesirable results if an artificially large mass has been introduced into the model.
One common example is when an artificially large mass is added to the base of a structure to facilitate acceleration
spectrum input. (You can use the large mass to convert an acceleration spectrum to a force spectrum.) The alpha
damping coefficient, which is multiplied by the mass matrix, will produce artificially large damping forces in such
a system, leading to inaccuracies in the spectrum input, as well as in the system response.
Beta damping and material damping can lead to undesirable results in a nonlinear analysis.These damping
coefficients are multiplied by the stiffness matrix, which is constantly changing in a nonlinear analysis.The resulting change in damping can sometimes be opposite to the actual change in damping that can occur in physical structures. For example, whereas physical systems that experience softening due to plastic response will
usually experience a corresponding increase in damping, an ANSYS model that has beta damping will experience
a decrease in damping as plastic softening response develops.
Material-dependent damping allows you to specify beta damping () as a material property (MP,DAMP). Note,
however, that MP,DAMP in a spectrum analysis (ANTYPE,SPECTR) specifies a material-dependent damping ratio ,
not . Also note that for multi-material elements such as SOLID46, SOLID65, SHELL91, and SHELL99, can only
be specified for the element as a whole, not for each material in the element. In these cases, is determined from
the material pointer for the element (set with the MAT command), rather than the material pointed to by any
real constant MAT for the element. MP,DAMP is not assumed to be temperature-dependent, and is always
evaluated at T = 0.0.
The constant material damping coefficient is available only for full and modal harmonic analyses.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
125
ALPHAD
BETAD
m
MP,DAMP j
Nm
m
j [K j ]
No
No
No
Nm
m s
j Ej
j =1
j =1
Nm
s
Ej
j =1
Nm
m
j [K j ]
Nm
T m
j [K j ]
Nm
T m
j [K j ]
No
2i
2i
j =1
DMPRAT
126
Harmonic
2
[K ]
j =1
j =1
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
No
m
MDAMP i
Element
Damping
No
Ne
[Ck ]
k =1
Ne
MP,DMPR
Harmonic
Nm
2j [K j ]
j =1
No
Ne
Ne
[Ck ]
T [Ck ]
T [Ck ]
No
No
No
k =1
No
k =1
N
T m
j =1
2j [K j ]
No
No
k =1
No
Note
1.
For modal, mode-superposition , and spectrum analyses the boxes are split where applicable
with the top indicating the Lanczos method and the bottom indicating the QR damped
method.
127
128
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Response Spectrum
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
129
s
s
f
f
f
s = spectral value
f = frequency
f
(a)
(b)
2.
130
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
4.
5.
6.
The modal solution is required because the structure's mode shapes and frequencies must be available to calculate
the spectrum solution. Also, by performing the spectrum solution ahead of mode expansion, you can expand
only the significant modes that contribute to the final solution.
Only linear behavior is valid in a spectrum analysis. Nonlinear elements, if any, are treated as linear. If you
include contact elements, for example, their stiffnesses are calculated based on their initial status and are
never changed.
Both Young's modulus (EX) (or stiffness in some form) and density (DENS) (or mass in some form) must
be defined. Material properties can be linear, isotropic or orthotropic, and constant or temperature-dependent. Nonlinear properties, if any, are ignored.
Use the Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, subspace, or reduced method to extract the modes.The other
methods - unsymmetric, damped, and QR damped - are not valid for subsequent spectrum analysis.
The number of modes extracted should be enough to characterize the structure's response in the frequency
range of interest.
Use MXPAND,-1 so that modes are not expanded at this time, but can be expanded selectively in a separate solution pass. (See the use of the SIGNIF field on the MXPAND command.) Otherwise, choose YES
to expand all the modes at this phase.
Be sure to constrain those DOF where you want to apply a base excitation spectrum.
Enter SOLUTION.
Command(s): /SOLU
GUI: Main Menu> Solution
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
131
Define the analysis type and analysis options. ANSYS offers the following analysis options for a spectrum
analysis. Not all modal analysis options and not all eigenvalue extraction techniques work with all spectrum
analysis options.
Command
GUI Path
ANTYPE
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis
ANTYPE
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis> Spectrum
SPOPT
SPOPT
3.
Specify load step options.The following options are available for single-point response spectrum analysis:
132
Spectrum Options
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Note
Material-dependent damping ratio [MP,DAMP] is also available but only if specified
in the modal analysis. MP,DAMP also specifies a material-dependent constant
damping ratio (and not material-dependent beta damping, as used in other analyses).
4.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for additional response spectra, if any. Note that solutions are not written to the
file.rst at this time.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
133
Click on the expansion pass option button on the Expansion Pass dialog box to signify YES for an expansion
pass.
Command(s): MXPAND
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis> Modal
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Expansion Pass
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Expansion Pass> Expand Modes
2.
You must expand modes regardless of whether you used the Block Lanczos, PCG Lanczos, subspace, or
reduced extraction method. Details of how to expand the modes are explained in Chapter 3: Modal
Analysis under "Expand the Modes" as a separate solution pass, but you should keep in mind the following
points:
Only significant modes can be selectively expanded. (See the use of the SIGNIF field on the MXPAND
command.) If you want to selectively expand modes use MXPAND,-1.You then perform mode expansion as a separate solution pass after performing the spectrum solution.
Only expanded modes are used for the mode combination operation in the subsequent mode combination pass.
If you are interested in stresses caused by the spectrum, be sure to request stress calculations here.
By default, no stresses are calculated in the expansion pass, which means no stresses are available
for the spectrum analysis.
If you want to expand all the modes, you can include the mode expansion steps in the modal solution
pass by issuing the MXPAND command. If you are using the GUI method and want to expand all the
modes, choose YES for mode expansion on the dialog box for the modal analysis options [MODOPT]
in the modal solution step. But if you want to expand only the significant modes, you must perform
mode expansion as a separate solution pass after performing the spectrum solution.
Note that modal analysis solutions are written to the results file (Jobname.RST) only if the mode expansion is
performed.
Enter SOLUTION.
Command(s): /SOLU
GUI: Main Menu> Solution
2.
134
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
3.
Grouping (GRP)
The NRLSUM method is typically used in the context of the Dynamic Design and Analysis Method (DDAM)
spectrum analysis.
The following commands are used to invoke different methods of mode combinations:
Command(s): SRSS, CQC, DSUM, GRP, NRLSUM
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis> Spectrum
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Opts> Single-pt resp
Main Menu> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> Spectrum-Single Point-Mode Combine
These commands allow computation of three different types of responses:
Note
You must specify damping if you use the Complete Quadratic Combination method of mode
combination (CQC). In addition, if you use material-dependent damping [MP,DAMP,...], you
must request that element results be calculated in the modal expansion. (Elcalc = YES on
the MXPAND command.)
4.
Start solution.
Command(s): SOLVE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS
The mode combination phase writes a file of POST1 commands (Jobname.MCOM). Read in this file in
POST1 to do the mode combinations, using the results file (Jobname.RST) from the modal expansion
pass.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
135
5.
If you selected displacement as the response type (label = DISP), displacements and stresses are
combined for each mode on the mode combination command.
If you selected velocity as the response type (label = VELO), velocities and stress velocities are combined for each mode on the mode combination command.
If you selected acceleration as the response type (label = ACEL), accelerations and stress accelerations
are combined for each mode on the mode combination command.
Note
If you want to compute velocity or acceleration in addition to displacement, repeat the mode
combination step after postprocessing the displacement solution by using the VELO or
ACEL label on the mode combination commands (SRSS, CQC, GRP, DSUM, NRLSUM). Remember that the existing Jobname.MCOM file is overwritten by the additional mode combination step(s).
Note
If you want a direct combination of the derived stresses (S1, S2, S3, SEQV, SI) from the results file, issue
the SUMTYPE,PRIN command before reading in the Jobname.MCOM file. With the PRIN option,
component stresses are not available.
Note that the command default (SUMTYPE,COMP) is to directly operate only on the unaveraged element component stresses and compute the derived quantities from these. Refer to Section 5.4.3: Creating and Combining
Load Cases in the Basic Analysis Guide. Also, see the Commands Reference for a description of the SUMTYPE
command.
1.
136
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
2.
Display results.
Caution
Derived data, such as stresses and strains, are averaged at the nodes by the PLNSOL
command.This averaging results in "smeared" values at nodes where elements of different
materials, different shell thicknesses, or other discontinuities meet.To avoid the smearing
effect, use selecting (described in Chapter 7: Selecting and Components in the Basic Analysis Guide) to select elements of the same material, same shell thickness, etc. before issuing
PLNSOL.
You can view correct membrane results for shells (SHELL, MID) by using KEYOPT(8) = 2
(for SHELL93, SHELL181, SHELL208, SHELL209, and SHELL281) or KEYOPT(11) = 2 (SHELL63).
These KEYOPTS write the mid-surface node results directly to the results file, and allow
the membrane results to be directly operated on during squaring operations.The default
method of averaging the TOP and BOT squared values to obtain a MID value can possibly
yield incorrect MID values.
Other Capabilities
Many other postprocessing functions, such as mapping results onto a path, transforming results to
different coordinate systems, and load case combinations, are available in POST1. See The General
Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide for details.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
137
The modal solution and spectrum solution passes can be combined into a single modal analysis [ANTYPE,MODAL] solution pass, with spectrum loads [SV, SVTYP, SED, FREQ].
The mode expansion and mode combination solution passes can be combined into a single modal analysis [ANTYPE,MODAL and EXPASS,ON] solution pass with a mode combination command.
138
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
6.3.4. Procedure
Figure 6.2 Simply Supported Beam with Vertical Motion of Both Supports
Y
h
X
Support Motion
Problem Sketch
Y
MDOF
1
6.3.4. Procedure
6.3.4.1. Set the Analysis Title
1.
2.
Type the text "Seismic Response of a Beam Structure" and click on OK.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete.The Element Types
dialog box appears.
2.
3.
Scroll down the list on the left to "Structural Beam" and select it.
4.
5.
6.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
139
Choose menu path Main Menu > Preprocessor > Real Constants > Add/Edit/Delete.The Real Constants
dialog box appears.
2.
Click on Add.The Element Type for Real Constants dialog box appears.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models.The Define Material Model Behavior dialog box appears.
2.
In the Material Models Available window, double-click on the following options: Structural, Linear,
Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears.
3.
Enter 30E6 for EX (Young's modulus), 0.30 for PRXY (Poisson's ratio), and then click on OK. Material
Model Number 1 appears in the Material Models Defined window on the left.
4.
5.
6.
Choose menu path Material> Exit to remove the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Keypoints> In Active CS.The
Create Keypoints in Active Coordinate System dialog box appears.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click on OK.
7.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Numbering.The Plot Numbering Controls dialog box
appears.
8.
9.
Click on OK.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Lines> Lines> Straight Line. A
picking menu appears.
11. Click on keypoint 1, and then on keypoint 2. A straight line appears between the two keypoints.
12. Click on OK.The picking menu closes.
140
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
6.3.4. Procedure
Choose menu path Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Size Cntrls > ManualSize > Global >
Size.The Global Element Sizes dialog box appears.
2.
Enter 8 for the number of element divisions and click on OK.The Global Element Sizes dialog box closes.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh> Lines. A picking menu appears.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement> On
Nodes. A picking menu appears.
2.
In the graphics window, click once on the node at the left end of the beam.
3.
4.
In the scroll box of DOFs to be constrained, click once on "UY" to highlight it.
5.
Click on OK.
6.
Repeat steps 1-3 and select the node at the right end of the beam.
7.
In the scroll box of DOFs to be constrained, click once on "UX." Both "UX" and "UY" should be highlighted.
8.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis.The New Analysis dialog
box appears.
2.
Click on "Modal" to select it and click on OK.The New Analysis dialog box closes.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options.The Modal Analysis
dialog box appears.
4.
5.
6.
Click on the Calculate elem. results dialog button [MXPAND] to specify YES.
7.
Click on OK.The Modal Analysis dialog box closes, and the Reduced Modal Analysis dialog box appears.
8.
Enter 3 for the No. of modes to print and click on OK.The Reduced Modal Analysis dialog box closes.
9.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected> Define.The picking menu
appears.
10. Choose Pick All.The Define Master DOFs dialog box appears.
11. Select UY for the 1st degree of freedom and click on OK.The Define Master DOFs dialog box closes.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS.The Solve Current Load Step dialog box
appears, along with a status window.
2.
Carefully review the information in the status window, and then click on Close.
3.
Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to start the solution.
4.
When the solution is finished, a dialog box stating "Solution is done!" appears. Click on Close.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
141
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis.The New Analysis dialog
box appears, along with a warning message that states: "Changing the analysis type is only valid within
the first load step. Pressing OK will cause you to exit and reenter SOLUTION.This will reset load step
count to 1." Click on CLOSE to close the warning message box.
2.
Click on "Spectrum" to select it, and click on OK.The New Analysis dialog box closes.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> Single Point> Settings.The
Settings for Single-point Response Spectrum dialog box appears.
4.
Select "Seismic displac" in the scroll box as the type of response spectrum.
5.
Enter 0,1,0 for excitation direction into the excitation direction input windows and click on OK.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> Single Point> Freq Table.
The Frequency Table dialog box appears.
2.
Enter 0.1 for FREQ1, enter 10 for FREQ2, and click on OK.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> Single Point> Spectr Values.
The Spectrum Values - Damping Ratio dialog box appears.
4.
Click on OK to accept the default of no damping.The Spectrum Values dialog box appears.
5.
6.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS.The Solve Current Load Step dialog box
appears, along with a status window.
2.
Carefully review the information in the status window, and then click on Close.
3.
Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to start the solution.
4.
When the solution is finished, a dialog box stating "Solution is done!" appears. Click on Close.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis.The New Analysis dialog
box appears, along with a warning message that states: "Changing the analysis type is only valid within
the first load step. Pressing OK will cause you to exit and reenter SOLUTION.This will reset load step
count to 1." Click on CLOSE to close the warning message box.
2.
Click on "Modal" to select it, and click on OK.The New Analysis dialog box closes.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Expansion Pass.The Expansion Pass dialog
box appears.
4.
Click on the expansion pass dialog button to turn it ON and click on OK.The Expansion Pass dialog box
closes.
142
Choose menu path Main Menu > Solution > Load Step Opts > Expansion Pass > Single Expand >
Expand Modes.The Expand Modes dialog box appears.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
6.3.4. Procedure
2.
Enter 10 for the number of modes to expand and enter 0.005 for the significant threshold.
3.
Click on the calculate element results dialog button to specify YES for element results calculation.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS.The Solve Current Load Step dialog box
appears, along with a status window.
2.
Carefully review the information in the status window, and then click on Close.
3.
Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to start the solution.
4.
When the solution is finished, a dialog box stating "Solution is done!" appears. Click on Close.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis.The New Analysis dialog
box appears, along with a warning message that states: "Changing the analysis type is only valid within
the first load step. Pressing OK will cause you to exit and reenter SOLUTION.This will reset load step
count to 1." Click on CLOSE to close the warning message box.
2.
Click on "Spectrum" to select it, and click on OK.The New Analysis dialog box closes.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options.The Spectrum Analysis
dialog box appears.
4.
Accept the default spectrum type single-point response. Click on OK.The Spectrum Analysis dialog box
closes.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> Single Point> Mode Combine.
The Mode Combination Methods dialog box appears.
2.
3.
4.
Select displacement for the type of output. Click OK.The Mode Combination Methods dialog box closes.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS.The Solve Current Load Step dialog box
appears, along with a status window.
2.
Carefully review the information in the status window, and then click on Close.
3.
Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to start the solution.
4.
When the solution is finished, a dialog box stating "Solution is done!" appears. Click on Close.
Choose menu path Main Menu > General Postproc > Results Summary.The SET Command listing
window appears.
2.
Review the information in the listing window, and click on Close.The SET Command listing window
closes.
3.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Read Input From.The Read File dialog box appears.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
143
From the left side of the Read File dialog box, select the directory containing your results from the scroll
box.
5.
From the right side of the Read File dialog box, select the jobname.mcom file from the scroll box.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.
! Mode-frequency analysis
! Householder, print first 3 reduced mode shapes
! Expand first mode shape, calculate element stresses
/SOLU
ANTYPE,SPECTR
SPOPT,SPRS
SED,,1
SVTYPE,3
FREQ,.1,10
SV,,.44,.44
SOLVE
FINISH
!
!
!
!
!
!
/SOLU
ANTYPE,MODAL
EXPASS,ON
MXPAND,10,,,YES,0.005
144
Spectrum analysis
Single point spectrum
Global Y-axis as spectrum direction
Seismic displacement spectrum
Frequency points for SV vs. freq. table
Spectrum values associated with frequency points
! Mode-frequency analysis
! Expand 10 mode shapes, calculate element stresses
! set signif=0.005
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
SOLVE
FINISH
/POST1
SET,LIST
/INP,,mcom
PRNSOL,DOF
PRESOL,ELEM
PRRSOL,F
FINISH
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Of these, the first two steps are the same as described for a single-point response spectrum analysis. The procedure
for the remaining four steps is explained below. Random vibration analysis is not available in the ANSYS Professional program.
In the GUI method, the dialog box for the modal analysis options [MODOPT] contains an option for mode expansion [MXPAND]. Choose YES for mode expansion.You then follow the instructions in Section 6.6.1: Expand the
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
145
Only expanded modes are used for the mode combination step.
If you are interested in stresses caused by the spectrum, be sure to request stress calculations here. By
default, no stresses are calculated in the expansion pass, which means no stresses are available at the end
of the spectrum solution.
The mode expansion can be performed as a separate step, or can be included in the modal analysis phase.
At the end of the expansion pass, leave SOLUTION with the FINISH command. If you want to exit ANSYS
after running the modal analysis, you must save the database at this point.
As explained in Chapter 3: Modal Analysis, you can combine the modal solution and mode expansion steps by
including the MXPAND command in the modal analysis step (GUI and batch modes).
Enter SOLUTION.
Command(s): /SOLU
GUI: Main Menu> Solution
2.
3.
Specify stress calculations ON [SPOPT] if you are interested in stress results. Stresses caused by the
spectrum are calculated only if they were also requested during the modal expansion pass.
Specify load step options.The following options are available for a random vibration analysis:
Spectrum Data
Type of PSD
Command(s): PSDUNIT
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Settings
The PSD type can be displacement, velocity, force, pressure, or acceleration. Whether it is a base
excitation or a nodal excitation is specified in Steps 4 and 5. If a pressure PSD is to be applied, the
pressures should be applied in the modal analysis itself.
PSD-versus-frequency table
Define a piecewise-linear (in log-log scale) PSD versus frequency table. Since a curve-fitting
polynomial is used for the closed-form integration of the curve, you should graph the input, which
146
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Note
If no damping is specified in a PSD analysis, a default DMPRAT of 1 percent is used.
Note
Material-dependent damping ratio [MP,DAMP] is also available but only if specified in
the modal analysis. MP,DAMP also specifies a material-dependent constant damping
ratio (and not material-dependent beta damping, as used in other analyses).
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
147
Note
You can apply base excitations only at nodes that were constrained in the modal analysis.
Command(s): D (or DK, DL, or DA) for base excitation F (or FK) for nodal excitation LVSCALE
for pressure PSD
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Spectrum> Base PSD Excit>
On Nodes
5.
6.
If you need to apply multiple PSD excitations on the same model, repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for each additional PSD table.Then define, as necessary, the degree of correlation between the excitations, using any
of the following commands:
Command(s): COVAL for cospectral values, QDVAL for quadspectral values, PSDSPL for a
spatial relationship, PSDWAV for a wave propagation relationship, PSDGRAPH to graph the
data overlaid with the fitted curve
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Correlation
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Graph Tables
When you use the PSDSPL or PSDWAV command, you must use SPATIAL or WAVE, respectively, for
Parcor on the PFACT command. PSDSPL and PSDWAV relationships might be quite CPU intensive
for multi-point base excitations. Nodal excitation and base excitation input must be consistent when
using PSDWAV and PSDSPL (for example, FY cannot be applied to one node and FZ be applied to another).The PSDSPL and PSDWAV commands are not available for a pressure PSD analysis.
7.
148
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
9.
Enter Solution.
Command(s): /SOLU
GUI: Main Menu> Solution
2.
3.
Only the PSD mode combination method is valid in a random vibration analysis.This method triggers
calculation of the one-sigma displacements, stresses, etc., in the structure. If you do not issue the PSDCOM
command, the program does not calculate the one-sigma response of the structure.
Command(s): PSDCOM
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Mode Combin
The SIGNIF and COMODE fields on the PSD mode combination method [PSDCOM] offer options to reduce
the number of modes to be combined (see the description of PSDCOM command). If you want to exercise
these options, it is prudent to print the modal covariance matrices in Section 6.6.2: Obtain the Spectrum
Solution to first investigate the relative contributions of the modes toward the final solution.
4.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
149
2.
3.
The following output, if mode combinations are requested [PSDCOM] and based on the PSDRES setting:
1 velocity solution (velocities, stress velocities, strain velocities, and force velocities)
1 acceleration solution (accelerations, stress accelerations, strain accelerations, and force accelerations)
You can review these results in POST1, the general postprocessor, and then calculate response PSDs in POST26,
the time-history postprocessor.
Note
Load step 2 is left blank if you specify only nodal PSD excitation. Also, if you suppress the displacement,
velocity, or acceleration solution using the PSDRES command, the corresponding load step is left
blank. Also, the superelement displacement file (.DSUB) is not written for load steps 3, 4, or 5 in a
PSD analysis.
2 (Base excit.
only)
3
4
5
Substep
1
2
3
Etc.
1
2
Etc.
1
1
1
Contents
Expanded modal solution for 1st mode
Expanded modal solution for 2nd mode
Expanded modal solution for 3rd mode
Etc.
Unit static solution for PSD table 1
Unit static solution for PSD table 2
Etc.
1 sigma displacement solution
1 sigma velocity solution (if requested)
1 sigma acceleration solution (if requested)
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Command(s): SET
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set
Note
Nodal stress averaging performed by the PLNSOL command may not be appropriate in a random
vibration analysis because the "stresses" are not actual stresses but stress statistics.
2.
Store the frequency vector.NPTS is the number of frequency points to be added on either side of natural
frequencies in order to "smooth" the frequency vector (defaults to 5).The frequency vector is stored as
variable 1.
Command(s): STORE,PSD,NPTS
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Store Data
3.
Define the variables in which the result items of interest (displacements, stresses, reaction forces, etc.)
are to be stored.
Command(s): NSOL, ESOL, and/or RFORCE
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables
4.
Calculate the response PSD and store it in the desired variable.The PLVAR command can then be used
to plot the response PSD.
Command(s): RPSD
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Calc Resp PSD
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
151
Define the variables in which the result items of interest (displacements, stresses, reaction forces, etc.)
are to be stored.
Command(s): NSOL, ESOL, and/or RFORCE
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables
3.
Calculate the contributions of each response component (relative or absolute response) and store them
in the desired variable.The PLVAR command can then be used to plot the modal contributions (relative
response) followed by the contributions of pseudo-static and mixed part responses to the total covariance.
Command(s): CVAR
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Calc Covariance
4.
! Jobname
! Title
! Enter PREP7
! Generate model
!
!
!
!
Enter SOLUTION
Modal analysis
Reduced method
Master DOF
! Constraints
! Initiates solution
! Reenter SOLUTION
! Expansion pass
! Number of modes to expand
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Spectrum analysis
Power Spectral Density; No. of modes;
Stress calcs. on/off
Type of spectrum
Frequency pts. (for spectrum values vs.
frequency tables)
Spectrum values
Damping ratio
Base excitation
Calculate participation factors
Output controls
PSDVAL, ...
DMPRAT, ...
D,0
PFACT, ...
PSDRES, ...
SAVE
SOLVE
FINISH
!
! Combine modes using PSD method
/SOLU
! Re-enter SOLUTION
152
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
! Spectrum analysis
! PSD mode combinations with significance factor and
!
option for selecting a subset of modes for
!
combination
SOLVE
FINISH
!
! Review the Results
/POST1
! Enter POST1
SET, ...
! Read results from appropriate load step, substep
...! Postprocess as desired
...! (PLDISP; PLNSOL; NSORT; PRNSOL; etc.)
...
FINISH
!
! Calculate Response PSD
/POST26
! Enter POST26
STORE,PSD
! Store frequency vector (variable 1)
NSOL,2,...
! Define variable 2 (nodal data)
RPSD,3,2,,...
! Calculate response PSD (variable 3)
PLVAR,3
! Plot the response PSD
...
! Calculate Covariance
RESET
! Reset all POST26 specifications to initial defaults.
NSOL,2
! Define variable 2 (nodal data).
NSOL,3
! Define variable 3 (nodal data).
CVAR,4,2,3,1,1
! Calculate covariance between displacement
!
at nodes 2 and 3.
*GET,CVAR23U,VARI,4,EXREME,CVAR ! Obtain covariance.
FINISH
Use the U. S. Customary system of units [inches (not feet), pounds, etc.] for all input data - model geometry,
material properties, element real constants, etc.
Use the ADDAM and VDDAM commands instead of SVTYP, SV, and FREQ to specify the spectrum values
and types. Specify the global direction of excitation using the SED command. Based on the coefficients
specified in the ADDAM and VDDAM commands, the program computes the mode coefficients according
to the empirical equations given in the Theory Reference for ANSYS and ANSYS Workbench.
The most applicable mode combination method is the NRL sum method [NRLSUM]. Mode combinations
are done in the same manner as for a single-point response spectrum. Mode combinations require
damping.
No damping needs to be specified for solution because it is implied by the ADDAM and VDDAM commands. If damping is specified, it is used for mode combinations but ignored for solution.
Note
As in the Single-point Response Spectrum analysis, DDAM spectrum analysis requires six steps to
systematically perform the analysis.
If you are using batch mode, note the following:
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
153
The modal solution and DDAM spectrum solution passes can be combined into a single modal analysis
[ANTYPE,MODAL] solution pass with DDAM spectrum loads [ADDAM, VDDAM, SED].
The mode expansion and mode combination solution passes can be combined into a single modal analysis [ANTYPE,MODAL and EXPASS,ON] solution pass with a mode combination command.
You cannot specify any degree of correlation between the spectra (i.e., they are assumed to be uncorrelated).
Only relative results (relative to the base excitation) not absolute values, are calculated.
Results from a multi-point response spectrum analysis are written to the mode combination file, Jobname.MCOM,in the form of POST1 commands.The commands calculate the overall response of the structure
by combining the maximum modal responses in some fashion (specified by the mode combination
command in SOLUTION).The overall response consists of the overall displacements and, if placed on the
results file during the modal expansion pass, the overall stresses, strains, and reaction forces. If Label =
VELO or ACEL on the mode combination command (SRSS, CQC, GRP, DSUM, or NRLSUM) during SOLUTION, the corresponding velocity or acceleration responses are written to the mode combination file.
Multi-point response spectrum analysis is not available in the ANSYS Professional program.
154
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
155
Snap-through
buckling
Bifurcation point
Limit load (from
nonlinear buckling)
u
(b)
(a)
156
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Forces (and displacements) maintain their original orientation, but surface loads will "follow" the changing
geometry of the structure as it deflects.Therefore, be sure to apply the proper type of loads.
Carry your stability analysis through to the point of identifying the critical load in order to calculate the
structure's factor of safety with respect to nonlinear buckling. Merely establishing the fact that a structure
is stable at a given load level is generally insufficient for most design practice; you will usually be required
to provide a specified safety factor, which can only be determined by establishing the actual limit load.
For those elements that support the consistent tangent stiffness matrix (BEAM4 and SHELL63), activate
the consistent tangent stiffness matrix (KEYOPT(2) = 1 and NLGEOM,ON) to enhance the convergence
behavior of your nonlinear buckling analyses and improve the accuracy of your results.This element
KEYOPT must be defined before the first load step of the solution and cannot be changed once the solution
has started.
Many other elements (such as BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL181, and SHELL281) provide consistent tangent
stiffness matrix with NLGEOM,ON.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
157
2.
3.
4.
5.
Only linear behavior is valid. Nonlinear elements, if any, are treated as linear. If you include contact elements,
for example, their stiffnesses are calculated based on their status after the static prestress run and are
never changed.
Young's modulus (EX) (or stiffness in some form) must be defined. Material properties may be linear, isotropic or orthotropic, and constant or temperature-dependent. Nonlinear properties, if any, are ignored.
Prestress effects (PSTRES) must be activated. Eigenvalue buckling analysis requires the stress stiffness
matrix to be calculated.
Unit loads are usually sufficient (that is, actual load values need not be specified).The eigenvalues calculated
by the buckling analysis represent buckling load factors.Therefore, if a unit load is specified, the load
factors represent the buckling loads. All loads are scaled. (Also, the maximum permissible eigenvalue is
1,000,000 - you must use larger applied loads if your eigenvalue exceeds this limit.)
It is possible that different buckling loads may be predicted from seemingly equivalent pressure and force
loads in a eigenvalue buckling analysis.The difference can be attributed to the fact that pressure is considered as a follower load.The force on the surface depends on the prescribed pressure magnitude and
also on the surface orientation. Forces are not considered as follower loads. As with any numerical analysis,
158
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Note that eigenvalues represent scaling factors for all loads. If certain loads are constant (for example,
self-weight gravity loads) while other loads are variable (for example, externally applied loads), you need
to ensure that the stress stiffness matrix from the constant loads is not factored by the eigenvalue solution.
One strategy that you can use to achieve this end is to iterate on the eigensolution, adjusting the variable
loads until the eigenvalue becomes 1.0 (or nearly 1.0, within some convergence tolerance). Design optimization could be useful in driving this iterative procedure to a final answer.
Consider, for example, a pole having a self-weight W0, which supports an externally-applied load, A.To
determine the limiting value of A in an eigenvalue buckling solution, you could solve repetitively, using
different values of A, until by iteration you find an eigenvalue acceptably close to 1.0.
A = 1.0
Wo
Wo
= 100:
F = 100 + Wo
A = 100
A = 111
Wo
= 1.1:
F = 110 + 1.1 Wo
= 0.99:
F = 110 + 0.99 Wo
You can apply a nonzero constraint in the prestressing pass as the static load.The eigenvalues found in
the buckling solution will be the load factors applied to these nonzero constraint values. However, the
mode shapes will have a zero value at these degrees of freedom (and not the nonzero value specified).
2.
Note
Restarts are not valid in an eigenvalue buckling analysis.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
159
Note
When you specify an eigenvalue buckling analysis, a Solution menu that is appropriate for
buckling analyses appears.The Solution menu will be either "abridged" or "unabridged",
depending on the actions you took prior to this step in your ANSYS session.The abridged
menu contains only those solution options that are valid and/or recommended for buckling
analyses. If you are on the abridged Solution menu and you want to access other solution
options (that is, solution options that are valid for you to use, but their use may not be encouraged for this type of analysis), select the Unabridged Menu option from the Solution
menu. For details, see Section 3.4.1: Using Abridged Solution Menus in the Basic Analysis Guide.
3.
4.
For Method, specify the eigenvalue extraction method.You can choose subspace iteration or Block
Lanczos.The Block Lanczos and subspace iteration methods use the full system matrices. See Section 3.4.2.3: Option: Mode-Extraction Method (MODOPT) in this manual for more information about
these solution methods.
For NMODE, specify the number of eigenvalues to be extracted.This argument defaults to one, which
is usually sufficient for eigenvalue buckling.
For SHIFT, specify the point (load factor) about which eigenvalues are calculated.The shift point is
helpful when numerical problems are encountered (due to negative eigenvalues, for example). Defaults
to 0.0.
5.
6.
160
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
The mode shape file (Jobname.MODE) from the eigenvalue buckling solution must be available.
The database must contain the same model for which the solution was calculated.
Reenter SOLUTION.
Command(s): /SOLU
GUI: Main Menu> Solution
Note
You must explicitly leave SOLUTION (using the FINISH command) and reenter (/SOLU) before
performing the expansion pass.
2.
3.
4.
For NMODE, specify the number of modes to expand.This argument defaults to the total number of
modes that were extracted.
For Elcalc, indicate whether you want ANSYS to calculate stresses. "Stresses" in an eigenvalue
analysis do not represent actual stresses, but give you an idea of the relative stress or force distribution
for each mode. By default, no stresses are calculated.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
161
Printed Output
Use this option to include any results data on the output file (Jobname.OUT).
Command(s): OUTPR
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrl> Solu Printout
Note
The FREQ field on OUTPR and OUTRES can only be ALL or NONE, that is, the data can
be requested for all modes or no modes - you cannot write information for every other
mode, for instance.
5.
6.
Leave the SOLUTION processor.You can now review results in the postprocessor.
Command(s): FINISH
GUI: Close the Solution menu.
Note
The expansion pass has been presented here as a separate step.You can make it part of the
eigenvalue buckling solution by including the MXPAND command (Main Menu> Solution>
Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Expand Modes) as one of the analysis options.
Note
To review results in POST1, the database must contain the same model for which the buckling solution
was calculated (issue RESUME if necessary). Also, the results file (Jobname.RST) from the expansion
pass must be available.
1.
162
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Read in data for the desired mode to display buckling mode shapes. (Each mode is stored on the results
file as a separate substep.)
Command(s): SET,SBSTEP
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> load step
3.
4.
See the Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, PSTRES, D, F, SF, BUCOPT, EXPASS, MXPAND,
OUTRES, SET, PLDISP, and PLNSOL commands.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
163
11
F
10
10
9
8
/2
7
X
/2
6
5
4
3
2
Problem Sketch
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2.
Enter the text "Buckling of a Bar with Hinged Ends" and click on OK.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete.The Element Types
dialog box appears.
2.
3.
In the scroll box on the left, click on "Structural Beam" to select it.
4.
In the scroll box on the right, click on "2D elastic 3" to select it.
5.
Click on OK, and then click on Close in the Element Types dialog box.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants> Add/Edit/Delete.The Real Constants
dialog box appears.
2.
Click on Add.The Element Type for Real Constants dialog box appears.
164
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
4.
Enter .25 for area, 52083e-7 for IZZ, and .5 for height.
5.
Click on OK.
6.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models.The Define Material Model Behavior dialog box appears.
8.
In the Material Models Available window, double-click on the following options: Structural, Linear,
Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears.
9.
Enter 30e6 for EX (Young's modulus), and click on OK. Material Model Number 1 appears in the Material
Models Defined window on the left.
10. Choose menu path Material> Exit to remove the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> In Active CS.The Create
Nodes in Active Coordinate System dialog box appears.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Note
The triad, by default, hides the node number for node 1.To turn the triad off, choose menu
path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Window Controls> Window Options and select the "Not
Shown" option for Location of triad.Then click OK to close the dialog box.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> Fill between Nds.The
Fill between Nds picking menu appears.
8.
Click on node 1, then 11, and click on OK.The Create Nodes Between 2 Nodes dialog box appears.
9.
Click on OK to accept the settings (fill between nodes 1 and 11, and number of nodes to fill 9).
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Auto Numbered>
Thru Nodes.The Elements from Nodes picking menu appears.
11. Click on nodes 1 and 2, then click on OK.
12. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Copy> Elements> Auto Numbered.The
Copy Elems Auto-Num picking menu appears.
13. Click on Pick All.The Copy Elements (Automatically-Numbered) dialog box appears.
14. Enter 10 for total number of copies and enter 1 for node number increment.
15. Click on OK.The remaining elements appear in the ANSYS Graphics window.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> New Analysis.The
New Analysis dialog box appears.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
165
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options.The Static or SteadyState Analysis dialog box appears.
4.
In the scroll box for stress stiffness or prestress, scroll to "Prestress ON" to select it.
5.
Click on OK.
6.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement> On
Nodes.The Apply U,ROT on Nodes picking menu appears.
7.
Click on node 1 in the ANSYS Graphics window, then click on OK in the picking menu.The Apply U,ROT
on Nodes dialog box appears.
8.
9.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Force/Moment> On
Nodes.The Apply F/M on Nodes picking menu appears.
10. Click on node 11, then click OK.The Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears.
11. In the scroll box for Direction of force/mom, scroll to "FY" to select it.
12. Enter -1 for the force/moment value, and click on OK.The force symbol appears in the ANSYS Graphics
window.
2.
Carefully review the information in the status window, and click on Close.
3.
Click on OK in the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis.
Note
Click on Close in the Warning window if the following warning appears: Changing the analysis type is only valid within the first load step. Pressing OK will cause you to exit and reenter
SOLUTION.This will reset the load step count to 1.
2.
In the New Analysis dialog box, click the "Eigen Buckling" option on, then click on OK.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options.The Eigenvalue Buckling
Options dialog box appears.
4.
Click on the "Block Lanczos" option, and enter 1 for number of modes to extract.
5.
Click on OK.
6.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Expand Modes.
7.
8.
9.
Carefully review the information in the status window, and click on Close.
10. Click on OK in the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution.
166
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set.
2.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape.The Plot Deformed
Shape dialog box appears.
3.
Click the "Def + undeformed" option on. Click on OK.The deformed and undeformed shapes appear in
the ANSYS graphics window.
2.
!
!
!
!
Static analysis
Calculate prestress effects
Fix symmetry ends
Unit load at free end
! Buckling analysis
! Use Block Lanczos solution method, extract 1 mode
! Expand 1 mode shape
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
167
168
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
(a) staple
u
F
t0
t1
t2 t3
b2
b1
(c) pneumatic tire
169
Changing status
Geometric nonlinearities
Material nonlinearities
B
B
A
uTIP
170
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
u
Before each solution, the Newton-Raphson method evaluates the out-of-balance load vector, which is the difference between the restoring forces (the loads corresponding to the element stresses) and the applied loads.The
program then performs a linear solution, using the out-of-balance loads, and checks for convergence. If convergence criteria are not satisfied, the out-of-balance load vector is reevaluated, the stiffness matrix is updated, and
a new solution is obtained.This iterative procedure continues until the problem converges.
A number of convergence-enhancement and recovery features, such as line search, automatic load stepping,
and bisection, can be activated to help the problem to converge. If convergence cannot be achieved, then the
program attempts to solve with a smaller load increment.
In some nonlinear static analyses, if you use the Newton-Raphson method alone, the tangent stiffness matrix
may become singular (or non-unique), causing severe convergence difficulties. Such occurrences include nonlinear buckling analyses in which the structure either collapses completely or "snaps through" to another stable
configuration. For such situations, you can activate an alternative iteration scheme, the arc-length method, to
help avoid bifurcation points and track unloading.
The arc-length method causes the Newton-Raphson equilibrium iterations to converge along an arc, thereby
often preventing divergence, even when the slope of the load vs. deflection curve becomes zero or negative.
This iteration method is represented schematically in Figure 8.4,Traditional Newton-Raphson Method vs. ArcLength Method.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
171
F
Spherical arc
Fa
3
Fa
2
r3
r2
Fa
1
Fa
1
Converged solutions
r1 - The reference arc-length radius
Converged solutions
u
r1
The "top" level consists of the load steps that you define explicitly over a "time" span (see the discussion
of "time" in Chapter 2: Loading in the Basic Analysis Guide). Loads are assumed to vary linearly within load
steps (for static analyses).
Within each load step, you can direct the program to perform several solutions (substeps or time steps) to
apply the load gradually.
At each substep, the program will perform a number of equilibrium iterations to obtain a converged
solution.
Figure 8.5,Load Steps, Substeps, and Time illustrates a typical load history for a nonlinear analysis. Also see the
discussion of load steps, substeps, and equilibrium iterations in Chapter 2: Loading in the Basic Analysis Guide.
Substeps
Load step 1
Load step
Substep
Time
0
172
0.5
1.0
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
8.2.2. Substeps
The ANSYS program gives you a number of choices when you designate convergence criteria: you can base
convergence checking on forces, moments, displacements, or rotations, or on any combination of these items.
Additionally, each item can have a different convergence tolerance value. For multiple-degree-of-freedom
problems, you also have a choice of convergence norms.
You should almost always employ a force-based (and, when applicable, moment-based) convergence tolerance.
Displacement-based (and, when applicable, rotation-based) convergence checking can be added, if desired, but
should usually not be used alone.
1
3
2
F
8.2.2. Substeps
When using multiple substeps, you need to achieve a balance between accuracy and economy: more substeps
(that is, small time step sizes) usually result in better accuracy, but at a cost of increased run times. ANSYS provides
automatic time stepping that is designed for this purpose.
Automatic time stepping adjusts the time step size as needed, gaining a better balance between accuracy and
economy. Automatic time stepping activates the ANSYS program's bisection feature.
Bisection provides a means of automatically recovering from a convergence failure.This feature will cut a time
step size in half whenever equilibrium iterations fail to converge and automatically restart from the last converged
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
173
Note
Nodal coordinate system orientations are not updated in a large deflection analysis. Calculated displacements are therefore output in the original directions.
Deflection
Direction After
Deflection
Acceleration:
Nodal Force:
Element Pressure:
174
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
8.3.1. Stress-Strain
In large strain solutions, all stress-strain input and results will be in terms of true stress and true (or logarithmic)
strain. (In one dimension, true strain would be expressed as = ln ( / 0). For small-strain regions of response,
true strain and engineering strain are essentially identical.) To convert strain from small (engineering) strain to
logarithmic strain, use ln = ln (1 + eng). To convert from engineering stress to true stress, use true = eng (1 +
eng). (This stress conversion is valid only for incompressible plasticity stress-strain data.)
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
175
P
(b)
To use stress stiffening in the second category of systems, you must issue PSTRES,ON (GUI path Main Menu>
Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options) in your first load step.
Large strain and large deflection procedures include initial stress effects as a subset of their theory. For most
elements, initial stiffness effects are automatically included when large deformation effects are activated
[NLGEOM,ON] (GUI path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Basic Tab) or Main Menu>
Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options).
176
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
8.4.1.1. Plasticity
Most common engineering materials exhibit a linear stress-strain relationship up to a stress level known as the
proportional limit. Beyond this limit, the stress-strain relationship will become nonlinear, but will not necessarily
become inelastic. Plastic behavior, characterized by nonrecoverable strain, begins when stresses exceed the
material's yield point. Because there is usually little difference between the yield point and the proportional limit,
the ANSYS program assumes that these two points are coincident in plasticity analyses (see Figure 8.9,Elastoplastic
Stress-Strain Curve).
Plasticity is a nonconservative, path-dependent phenomenon. In other words, the sequence in which loads are
applied and in which plastic responses occur affects the final solution results. If you anticipate plastic response
in your analysis, you should apply loads as a series of small incremental load steps or time steps, so that your
model will follow the load-response path as closely as possible.The maximum plastic strain is printed with the
substep summary information in your output (Jobname.OUT).
Proportional Limit
Strain
Plastic Strain
The automatic time stepping feature [AUTOTS] (GUI path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control
( : Basic Tab) or Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc>Time and
Substps) will respond to plasticity after the fact, by reducing the load step size after a load step in which a large
number of equilibrium iterations was performed or in which a plastic strain increment greater than 15% was
encountered. If too large a step was taken, the program will bisect and resolve using a smaller step size.
Other kinds of nonlinear behavior might also occur along with plasticity. In particular, large deflection and large
strain geometric nonlinearities will often be associated with plastic material response. If you expect large deformations in your structure, you must activate these effects in your analysis with the NLGEOM command (GUI path
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Basic Tab) or Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
177
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
See the MPTEMP, MP, TB, TBTEMP, TBDATA, TBLIST, /XRANGE, and TBPLOT command descriptions for more
information.
178
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
T1
T2
SIG
SIG
1
1
2 3
4
4
T1
T2
EPS
Multilinear Kinematic Hardening
EPS
(a)
(b)
y
2y
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
179
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
In this example, the third point in the two stress-strain curves defines the temperature-dependent yield behavior
of the third sublayer.
A typical stress- plastic strain temperature data input using KINH is demonstrated by this example.
TB,KINH,1,2,3,PLASTIC
TBTEMP,20.0
TBPT,,0.0,1.0
TBPT,,0.1,1.2
TBPT,,0.2,1.3
TBTEMP,40.0
TBPT,,0.0,0.9
TBPT,,0.0900,1.0
TBPT,,0.129,1.05
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Stress = 1.0
Stress = 1.2
Stress = 1.3
Stress = 0.9
Stress = 1.0
Stress = 1.05
Alternatively, the same plasticity model can also be defined using TB, PLASTIC, as follows:
TB,PLASTIC,1,2,3,KINH
TBTEMP,20.0
TBPT,,0.0,1.0
TBPT,,0.1,1.2
TBPT,,0.2,1.3
TBTEMP,40.0
TBPT,,0.0,0.9
TBPT,,0.0900,1.0
TBPT,,0.129,1.05
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Stress = 1.0
Stress = 1.2
Stress = 1.3
Stress = 0.9
Stress = 1.0
Stress = 1.05
In this example, the stress - strain behavior is the same as the previous sample, except now the strain value is
the plastic strain.The plastic strain can be converted from total strain as follows:
Plastic Strain = Total Strain - (Stress/Young's Modulus).
A typical stress-strain temperature data input using MKIN is demonstrated by this example.
MPTEMP,1,0,500
MP,EX,1,12E6,-8E3
TB,MKIN,1,2
TBTEMP,,STRAIN
TBDATA,1,3.67E-3,5E-3,7E-3,10E-3,15E-3
TBTEMP,0.0
TBDATA,1,44E3,50E3,55E3,60E3,65E3
TBTEMP,500
TBDATA,1,29.33E3,37E3,40.3E3,43.7E3,47E3
/XRANGE,0,0.02
TBPLOT,MKIN,1
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Please see the MPTEMP, MP, TB, TBPT, TBTEMP, TBDATA, /XRANGE, and TBPLOT command descriptions for
more information.
Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening
The Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening (CHABOCHE) option uses the Chaboche model, which is a multi-component
nonlinear kinematic hardening model that allows you to superpose several kinematic models. See the Theory
Reference for ANSYS and ANSYS Workbench for details. Like the BKIN and MKIN options, you can use the CHABOCHE
180
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
The following example illustrates a data table of temperature dependent constants with two kinematic models
at two temperature points:
TB,CHABOCHE,1,2,2
TBTEMP,100
TBDATA,1,C11,C12,C13,C14,C15
TBTEMP,200
TBDATA,1,C21,C22,C23,C24,C25
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Please see the TB, TBTEMP, and TBDATA command descriptions for more information.
Bilinear Isotropic Hardening
The Bilinear Isotropic Hardening (BISO) option uses the von Mises yield criteria coupled with an isotropic work
hardening assumption.This option is often preferred for large strain analyses.You can combine BISO with
Chaboche, creep, viscoplastic, and Hill anisotropy options to simulate more complex material behaviors. See
Material Model Combinations in the Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.4.2:
Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings of material combinations.
Multilinear Isotropic Hardening
The Multilinear Isotropic Hardening (MISO) option is like the bilinear isotropic hardening option, except that
a multilinear curve is used instead of a bilinear curve.This option is not recommended for cyclic or highly nonproportional load histories in small-strain analyses. It is, however, recommended for large strain analyses.The
MISO option can contain up to 20 different temperature curves, with up to 100 different stress-strain points allowed
per curve. Strain points can differ from curve to curve.You can combine this option with nonlinear kinematic
hardening (CHABOCHE) for simulating cyclic hardening or softening.You can also combine the MISO option
with creep, viscoplastic, and Hill anisotropy options to simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material
Model Combinations in the Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.4.2: Material
Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings of material combinations.The stress-strain-temperature curves from the MKIN example would be input for a multilinear isotropic hardening material as follows:
/prep7
MPTEMP,1,0,500
! Define temperature-dependent EX,
MPDATA,EX,1,,14.665E6,12.423e6
MPDATA,PRXY,1,,0.3
TB,MISO,1,2,5
TBTEMP,0.0
TBPT,DEFI,2E-3,29.33E3
TBPT,DEFI,5E-3,50E3
TBPT,DEFI,7E-3,55E3
TBPT,DEFI,10E-3,60E3
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
181
! Temperature = 500
! Strain, stress at temperature = 500
Alternatively, the same plasticity model can also be defined using TB, PLASTIC, as follows:
/prep7
MPTEMP,1,0,500
! Define temperature-dependent EX,
MPDATA,EX,1,,14.665E6,12.423e6
MPDATA,PRXY,1,,0.3
TB,PLASTIC,1,2,5,MISO
TBTEMP,0.0
TBPT,DEFI,0,29.33E3
TBPT,DEFI,1.59E-3,50E3
TBPT,DEFI,3.25E-3,55E3
TBPT,DEFI,5.91E-3,60E3
TBPT,DEFI,1.06E-2,65E3
TBTEMP,500
TBPT,DEFI,0,27.33E3
TBPT,DEFI,2.02E-3,37E3
TBPT,DEFI,3.76E-3,40.3E3
TBPT,DEFI,6.48E-3,43.7E3
TBPT,DEFI,1.12E-2,47E3
/XRANGE,0,0.02
TBPLOT,PLASTIC,1
! Temperature = 500
! Plastic strain, stress at temperature = 500
See the MPTEMP, MP, TB, TBTEMP, TBPT, /XRANGE, and TBPLOT command descriptions for more information.
Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening
The Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening (NLISO) option is based on either the Voce hardening law or the power law
(see the Theory Reference for ANSYS and ANSYS Workbench for details).The NLISO Voce hardening option is a
variation of BISO where an exponential saturation hardening term is appended to the linear term (see Figure 8.12,
NLISO Stress-Strain Curve).
Po
Stress
= k + Ropl
= k + R
Plastic strain
182
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Please see the TB, TBTEMP, and TBDATA command descriptions for more information.
Anisotropic
The Anisotropic (ANISO) option allows for different bilinear stress-strain behavior in the material x, y, and z directions as well as different behavior in tension, compression, and shear.This option is applicable to metals that
have undergone some previous deformation (such as rolling). It is not recommended for cyclic or highly nonproportional load histories since work hardening is assumed.The yield stresses and slopes are not totally independent
(see the Theory Reference for ANSYS and ANSYS Workbench for details).
To define anisotropic material plasticity, use MP commands (Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other>
Change Mat Props) to define the elastic moduli (EX, EY, EZ, NUXY, NUYZ, and NUXZ).Then, issue the TB command
[TB,ANISO] followed by TBDATA commands to define the yield points and tangent moduli. (See Nonlinear StressStrain Materials in the Elements Reference for more information.)
Hill Anisotropy
The Hill Anisotropy (HILL) option, when combined with other material options simulates plasticity, viscoplasticity,
and creep - all using the Hill potential. See Material Model Combinations in the Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.4.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings
of material combinations.The Hill potential may only be used with the following elements: PLANE42, SOLID45,
PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, SHELL281, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187,
SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209.
Drucker-Prager
The Drucker-Prager (DP) option is applicable to granular (frictional) material such as soils, rock, and concrete,
and uses the outer cone approximation to the Mohr-Coulomb law.
MP,EX,1,5000
MP,NUXY,1,0.27
TB,DP,1
TBDATA,1,2.9,32,0
See the MP, TB, and TBDATA command descriptions for more information.
Extended Drucker Prager
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
183
See the EDP argument and associated specifications in the TB command, the Extended Drucker-Prager in the
Elements Reference and also The Extended Drucker-Prager Model in the Theory Reference for ANSYS and ANSYS
Workbench for more information.
Gurson Plasticity
The Gurson Plasticity (GURSON) option is used to model porous metals.This option allows you to incorporate
microscopic material behaviors, such as void dilatancy, void nucleation, and void coalescence into macroscopic
plasticity models.The microscopic behaviors of voids are described using the porosity variables defined in
Gurson's Model in the Elements Reference
!The Gurson PLASTICITY Material Definition
/prep7
!!! define linear elasticity constants
mp,ex,1,2.1e4 ! Young modulus
mp,nuxy,1,0.3 ! Poison ratio
!!! define parameters related to Gurson model with
!!! the option of strain controlled nucleation with
!!! coalescence (COA1)
f_0=0.005
! initial porosity
q1=1.5
! first Tvergaard constant
q2=1.0
! second Tvergaard constant
f_c=0.15
! critical porosity
f_F=0.20
! failure porosity
f_N=0.04
! nucleation porosity
s_N=0.1
! standard deviation of mean strain
strain_N=0.3
! mean strain
sigma_Y=50.0
! initial yielding strength
power_N=0.1
! power value for nonlinear isotropic
! hardening power law (POWE)
!!! define Gurson material
tb,GURS,1,,8,COA1
tbdata,1,f_0,q1,q2,f_c,f_F
tbdata,6,f_N,s_N,strain_N
tb,nliso,1,,2,POWE
tbdata,,sigma_Y,power_N
tblist,all,all
See the GURSON argument and associated specifications in the TB command, and also Section 4.2.18: Gurson's
Model in the Theory Reference for ANSYS and ANSYS Workbench for more information.
Cast Iron
The Cast Iron (CAST, UNIAXIAL) option assumes a modified von Mises yield surface, which consists of the von
Mises cylinder in compression and a Rankine cube in tension. It has different yield strengths, flows, and hardenings
184
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Note
Cast Iron is intended for monotonic loading only and cannot be used with any other material model.
TB,CAST,1,,,ISOTROPIC
TBDATA,1,0.04
TB,UNIAXIAL,1,1,5,TENSION
TBTEMP,10
TBPT,,0.550E-03,0.813E+04
TBPT,,0.100E-02,0.131E+05
TBPT,,0.250E-02,0.241E+05
TBPT,,0.350E-02,0.288E+05
TBPT,,0.450E-02,0.322E+05
TB,UNIAXIAL,1,1,5,COMPRESSION
TBTEMP,10
TBPT,,0.203E-02,0.300E+05
TBPT,,0.500E-02,0.500E+05
TBPT,,0.800E-02,0.581E+05
TBPT,,0.110E-01,0.656E+05
TBPT,,0.140E-01,0.700E+05
Figure 8.13,Cast Iron Plasticity illustrates the idealized response of gray cast iron in tension and compression.
Compression
Tension
185
TBTEMP,1.0
TBDATA,1,19e5,0.3,1e3,100,
TBTEMP,2.0
TBDATA,1,21e5,0.3,2e3,100,
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
If you use state variables in the USERMAT subroutine, you must first define the number of state variables using
the TB,STATE command.You then use the TBDATA command to initialize the value of the state variables, as
shown in the following example:
TB,STATE,1,,4,
TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3,C4,
8.4.1.4. Hyperelasticity
A material is said to be hyperelastic if there exists an elastic potential function (or strain energy density function),
which is a scalar function of one of the strain or deformation tensors, whose derivative with respect to a strain
component determines the corresponding stress component.
Hyperelasticity can be used to analyze rubber-like materials (elastomers) that undergo large strains and displacements with small volume changes (nearly incompressible materials). Large strain theory is required [NLGEOM,ON].
A representative hyperelastic structure (a balloon seal) is shown in Figure 8.14,Hyperelastic Structure.
186
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
All of the 18x family of elements except the link and beam elements are suitable for simulating hyperelastic
materials (SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209).
For more information, see Mixed u-P Formulation Elements in the Elements Reference.
The material response in ANSYS hyperelastic models can be either isotropic or anisotropic, and it is assumed to
be isothermal. Because of this assumption, the strain energy potentials are expressed in terms of strain invariants.
Unless indicated otherwise, the hyperelastic materials are also assumed to be nearly or purely incompressible.
Material thermal expansion is also assumed to be isotropic.
ANSYS supports several options of strain energy potentials for the simulation of incompressible or nearly incompressible hyperelastic materials. All options are applicable to elements SHELL181, SHELL281, PLANE182, PLANE183,
SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209. Access these options through the TBOPT
argument of TB,HYPER.
One of the options, the Mooney-Rivlin option, is also applicable to explicit dynamics elements PLANE162,
SHELL163, SOLID164, and SOLID168.To access the Mooney-Rivlin option for these elements, use TB,MOONEY.
ANSYS provides tools to help you determine the coefficients for all of the hyperelastic options defined by
TB,HYPER.The TBFT command allows you to compare your experimental data with existing material data curves
and visually fit your curve for use in the TB command. All of the TBFT command capability is available via either
batch or interactive (GUI) mode. See Material Curve Fitting (also in this manual) for more information.
Each of the hyperelastic options is presented in the following sections.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
187
Refer to Ogden Hyperelastic Material Constants in the Elements Reference for a description of the material constants
required for this option.
Refer to Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Material in the Elements Reference for a description of the material constants
required for this option.
188
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Refer to Arruda-Boyce Hyperelastic Material Constants in the Elements Reference for a description of the material
constants required for this option.
Refer to Gent Hyperelastic Material Constants in the Elements Reference for a description of the material constants
required for this option.
Refer to Yeoh Hyperelastic Material Constants in the Elements Reference for a description of the material constants
required for this option.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
189
Refer to Blatz-Ko Foam Hyperelastic Material Constants in the Elements Reference for a description of the material
constants required for this option.
Refer to Ogden Compressible Foam Hyperelastic Material Constants in the Elements Reference for a description
of the material constants required for this option.
190
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
8.4.1.6. Creep
Creep is a rate dependent material nonlinearity in which the material continues to deform under a constant load.
Conversely, if a displacement is imposed, the reaction force (and stresses) will diminish over time (stress relaxation;
see Figure 8.18,Stress Relaxation and Creep(a)).The three stages of creep are shown in Figure 8.18,Stress Relaxation and Creep(b).The ANSYS program has the capability of modeling the first two stages (primary and secondary).The tertiary stage is usually not analyzed since it implies impending failure.
Rupture
Resulting Force
Applied
Displacement
Primary
Secondary
Tertiary
Time
(a) Stress relaxation
Time
(b) Creep strain due to
constant applied stress
Creep is important in high temperature stress analyses, such as for nuclear reactors. For example, suppose you
apply a preload to some part in a nuclear reactor to keep adjacent parts from moving. Over a period of time at
high temperature, the preload would decrease (stress relaxation) and potentially let the adjacent parts move.
Creep can also be significant for some materials such as prestressed concrete.Typically, the creep deformation
is permanent.
ANSYS analyzes creep using two time integration methods. Both are applicable to static or transient analyses.The
implicit creep method is robust, fast, accurate, and recommended for general use. It can handle temperature
dependent creep constants, as well as simultaneous coupling with isotropic hardening plasticity models.The
explicit creep method is useful for cases where very small time steps are required. Creep constants cannot be
dependent on temperature. Coupling with other plastic models is available by superposition only.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
191
Note
The terms implicit and explicit as applied to creep, have no relationship to explicit dynamics,
or any elements referred to as explicit elements.
The implicit creep method supports the following elements: PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95,
LINK180, SHELL181, SHELL281, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188,
BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209.
The explicit creep method supports the following elements: LINK1, LINK8, PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24, PLANE42,
SHELL43, SOLID45, PIPE60, SOLID62, SOLID65, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, and PLANE183.
The creep strain rate may be a function of stress, strain, temperature, and neutron flux level. Libraries of creep
strain rate equations are built into the ANSYS program for primary, secondary, and irradiation induced creep.
(See Creep Equations in the Elements Reference for discussions of, and input procedures for, these various creep
equations.) Some equations require specific units. In particular, for the explicit creep option, temperatures used
in the creep equations should be based on an absolute scale.
You can input other creep expressions using the user programmable feature and setting TBOPT = 100.You can
define the number of state variables using the TB command with Lab = STATE.The following example shows
how five state variables are defined.
TB,STATE,1,,5
You can simultaneously model creep [TB,CREEP] and isotropic, bilinear kinematic, and Hill anisotropy options
to simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material Model Combinations in the Elements Reference for
the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.4.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input
listings of material combinations.
To perform an implicit creep analysis, you must also issue the solution RATE command, with Option = ON (or
1).The following example shows a procedure for a time hardening creep analysis (See Figure 8.19,Time
Hardening Creep Analysis).
192
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Stress
Time
The user applied mechanical loading in the first load step, and turned the RATE command OFF to bypass the
creep strain effect. Since the time period in this load step will affect the total time thereafter, the time period for
this load step should be small. For this example, the user specified a value of 1.0E-8 seconds.The second load
step is a creep analysis.The RATE command must be turned ON. Here the mechanical loading was kept constant,
and the material creeps as time increases.
/SOLU
RATE,OFF
TIME,1.0E-8
...
SOLV
RATE,ON
TIME,100
...
SOLV
The RATE command works only when modeling implicit creep with either von Mises or Hill potentials.
When modeling implicit creep with von Mises potential, you can use the RATE command with the following
elements: LINK180, SHELL181, SHELL281, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190,
BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209.
When modeling anisotropic creep (TB,CREEP with TB,HILL), you can use the RATE command with the following
elements: PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, SHELL281, PLANE182, PLANE183,
SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209.
For most materials, the creep strain rate changes significantly at an early stage. Because of this, a general recommendation is to use a small initial incremental time step, then specify a large maximum incremental time step
by using solution command DELTIM or NSUBST. For implicit creep, you may need to examine the effect of the
time increment on the results carefully because ANSYS does not enforce any creep ratio control by default.You
can always enforce a creep limit ratio using the creep ratio control option in commands CRPLIM or CUTCONTROL,CRPLIMIT. A recommended value for a creep limit ratio ranges from 1 to 10.The ratio may vary with
materials so your decision on the best value to use should be based on your own experimentation to gain the
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
193
For the explicit creep method, you can incorporate other creep expressions into the program by using User
Programmable Features (see the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features).
For highly nonlinear creep strain vs. time curves, a small time step must be used with the explicit creep method.
Creep strains are not computed if the time step is less than 1.0e-6. A creep time step optimization procedure is
available [AUTOTS and CRPLIM] for automatically adjusting the time step as appropriate.
194
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
AS
sAS
sSA
SA
Use the MP command to input the linear elastic behavior of the austenite phase, and the TB,SMA command to
input the behavior of the transition and martensite phases. Use the TBDATA command to enter the specifics
(data sets) of the alloy material.You can enter up to six sets of data.
SMAs can be specified for the following elements: PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, and
SOLSH190.
A typical ANSYS input listing (fragment) will look similar to this:
MP,EX,1,60.0E3
MP,NUXY,1.0.3
TB,SMA,1,2
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
TBTEMP,10
TBDATA,1,520.0,600.0,300.0,200.0,0.07,0.12
TBTEMP,20
TBDATA,1,420.0,540.0,300.0,200.0,0.10,0.15
8.4.1.8. Viscoplasticity
Viscoplasticity is a time-dependent plasticity phenomenon, where the development of the plastic strains are
dependent on the rate of loading.The primary applications are high-temperature metal forming processes such
as rolling and deep drawing, which involve large plastic strains and displacements with small elastic strains (see
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
195
Viscoplasticity is defined by unifying plasticity and creep via a set of flow and evolutionary equations. A constraint
equation is used to preserve volume in the plastic region.
The Rate-Dependent Plasticity (Viscoplasticity) or TB,RATE option allows you to introduce the strain rate effect
in material models to simulate the time-dependent response of materials.Two material options are available,
the Perzyna model and the Peirce model (see the Theory Reference for ANSYS and ANSYS Workbench for details).
In contrast to other rate-dependent material options in ANSYS such as Creep or Anand's model, the Perzyna and
Peirce models also include a yield surface.The plasticity and thus the strain rate hardening effect are active only
after plastic yielding.You must use the models in combination with the BISO, MISO, or NLISO material options
to simulate viscoplasticity. Further, you can simulate anisotropic viscoplasticity by also combining the HILL option.
See Material Model Combinations in the Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.4.2:
Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings of material combinations. For isotropic
hardening, the intent is for simulating the strain rate hardening of materials rather than softening.This option
is also suitable for large strain analysis, and is applicable to the following elements: PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82,
SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, SHELL281, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187,
SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209. Some typical applications of these material options
are metal forming and micro-electromechanical systems (MEMS).
8.4.1.9. Viscoelasticity
Viscoelasticity is similar to creep, but part of the deformation is removed when the loading is taken off. A common
viscoelastic material is glass. Some plastics are also considered to be viscoelastic. One type of viscoelastic response
is illustrated in Figure 8.22,Viscoelastic Behavior (Maxwell Model).
196
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Resulting
Direction
Time
Time
Viscoelasticity is modeled with element types VISCO88 and VISCO89 for small deformation viscoelasticity and
LINK180, SHELL181, SHELL281, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188,
BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209 for small and large deformation viscoelasticity.You must input material
properties using the TB family of commands. For SHELL181, SHELL281, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186,
SOLID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209, the underlying elasticity is specified by either the MP command
(hypoelasticity) or by the TB,HYPER command (hyperelasticity). For LINK180, BEAM188, and BEAM189, the underlying elasticity is specified using the MP command (hypoelasticity) only.The elasticity constants correspond
to those of the fast load limit. Use the TB,PRONY and TB,SHIFT commands to input the relaxation property (see
the TB command description for more information).
!Small Strain Viscoelasticity
mp,ex,1,20.0E5 !elastic properties
mp,nuxy,1,0.3
tb,prony,1,,2,shear !define viscosity parameters (shear)
tbdata,1,0.5,2.0,0.25,4.0
tb,prony,1,,2,bulk !define viscosity parameters (bulk)
tbdata,1,0.5,2.0,0.25,4.0
!Large Strain Viscoelasticity
tb,hyper,1,,,moon !elastic properties
tbdata,1,38.462E4,,1.2E-6
tb,prony,1,,1,shear !define viscosity parameters
tbdata,1,0.5,2.0
tb,prony,1,,1,bulk !define viscosity parameters
tbdata,1,0.5,2.0
See Viscoelastic Material Constants in the Elements Reference and the Theory Reference for ANSYS and ANSYS
Workbench for details about how to input viscoelastic material properties using the TB family of commands.
ANSYS provides tools to help you determine the coefficients for all of the viscoelastic options defined by TB,PRONY.
The TBFT command allows you to compare your experimental data with existing material data curves and
visually fit your curve for use in the TB command. All of the TBFT command capability is available via either
batch or interactive (GUI) mode. See Material Curve Fitting (also in this manual) for more information.
8.4.1.10. Swelling
Certain materials respond to neutron flux by enlarging volumetrically, or swelling. In order to include swelling
effects, you must write your own swelling subroutine, USERSW. (See the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable
Features for a discussion of User-Programmable Features.) Swelling Equations in the Elements Reference discusses
how to use the TB family of commands to input constants for the swelling equations. Swelling can also be related
to other phenomena, such as moisture content.The ANSYS commands for nuclear swelling can be used analogously to define swelling due to other causes.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
197
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,180,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,180,200
! BISO TABLE
For information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1:
Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,180,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
! THIS EXAMPLE ISOTHERMAL
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,9.7E-4,180
TBPT,,1.0,380
! MISO TABLE
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
198
MP,EX,1,185E3
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,180,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
! THIS EXAMPLE ISOTHERMAL
TB,PLAS,,,,MISO
! MISO TABLE
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1,3,5
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TBTEMP,20,1
! THIS EXAMPLE TEMPERATURE DEPENDENT
TBDATA,1,500,20000,100,40000,200,10000
TBDATA,7,1000,200,100,100,0
TBTEMP,40,2
TBDATA,1,880,204000,200,43800,500,10200
TBDATA,7,1000,2600,2000,500,0
TBTEMP,60,3
TBDATA,1,1080,244000,400,45800,700,12200
TBDATA,7,1400,3000,2800,900,0
TB,NLISO,1,2
TBTEMP,40,1
TBDATA,1,880,0.0,80.0,3
TBTEMP,60,2
TBDATA,1,1080,0.0,120.0,7
! NLISO TABLE
For information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! Elastic Properties
ys=7.894657
sl=1000.0
tb,edp,1,,,LYFUN
tbdata,1,2.2526,ys
tb,edp,1,,,LFPOT
tbdata,1,0.566206
tb,plas,1,,4,miso
tbpt,defi,0.0,7.894
tbpt,defi,1,1007.894
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
199
! Elastic Properties
ys=7.894657
sl=1000.0
tb,edp,1,,,LYFUN
tbdata,1,2.2526,ys
tb,edp,1,,,LFPOT
tbdata,1,0.566206
tb,plas,1,,4,miso
tbpt,defi,0.0,7.894
tbpt,defi,1,1007.894
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the EDP option, see Extended Drucker-Prager in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1:
Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
tb,GURS,1,,3,SNNU
tbdata,1,f_N,strain_N,S_N
TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,Yield, Power_N
! BISO TABLE
For information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1:
Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the GURSON option, see Gurson's Model in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1:Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
200
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
tb,gurs,1,,2,COAL
tbdata,1,f_c,f_F
! COAL DEFINED
tb,miso,,,6
tbpt,,0.003333333,
tbpt,,0.018982279,
tbpt,,0.103530872,
tbpt,,0.562397597,
tbpt,,1.006031106,
tbpt,,2.934546576,
3333.333333
3966.666667
4700
5566.666667
5900
6566.666667
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the GURSON option, see Gurson's Model in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1:Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
201
tb,plas,1,,4,miso
tbpt, defi, 0.0, Yield
tbpt, defi, 1, 10.0*Yield
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the GURSON option, see Gurson's Model in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1:Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
tb,GURS,1,,3,SNNU
tbdata,1,f_N,strain_N,S_N
tb,nliso,1,1,2,5
tbdata,1,sigma_Y,power_N
For information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the GURSON option, see Gurson's Model in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1:Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,9000,10000
! BISO TABLE
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
! RATE TABLE
For information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1:
Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
202
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,0.015,30000
TBPT,,0.020,32000
TBPT,,0.025,33800
TBPT,,0.030,35000
TBPT,,0.040,36500
TBPT,,0.050,38000
TBPT,,0.060,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
! RATE TABLE
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the RATE option, see Rate-Dependent Viscoplastic Materials in the Elements Reference, and
Section 8.4.1.8: Viscoplasticity in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,PLAS,,,,MISO
TBPT,,0.00000,30000
TBPT,,4.00E-3,32000
TBPT,,8.10E-3,33800
TBPT,,1.25E-2,35000
TBPT,,2.18E-2,36500
TBPT,,3.10E-2,38000
TBPT,,4.05E-2,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
! RATE TABLE
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the RATE option, see Rate-Dependent Viscoplastic Materials in the Elements Reference, and
Section 8.4.1.8: Viscoplasticity in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,NLISO,1
! NLISO TABLE
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
203
! RATE TABLE
For information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the RATE option, see Rate-Dependent Viscoplastic Materials in the Elements Reference, and
Section 8.4.1.8: Viscoplasticity in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,9000,10000
! BISO TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
! CREEP TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
For information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1:
Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.6.1:
Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,0.015,30000
TBPT,,0.020,32000
TBPT,,0.025,33800
TBPT,,0.030,35000
TBPT,,0.040,36500
TBPT,,0.050,38000
TBPT,,0.060,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
! CREEP TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.6.1:
Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter.
204
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
TB,PLAS,,,,MISO
TBPT,,0.00000,30000
TBPT,,4.00E-3,32000
TBPT,,8.10E-3,33800
TBPT,,1.25E-2,35000
TBPT,,2.18E-2,36500
TBPT,,3.10E-2,38000
TBPT,,4.05E-2,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
! CREEP TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.6.1:
Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,NLISO,1
TBDATA,1,30000,100000,5200,172
! NLISO TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
! CREEP TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
For information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.6.1:
Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,BKIN,1,
TBDATA,1,42000,1000
! BKIN TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,6
TBDATA,1,7.4e-21,3.5,0,0,0,0
! CREEP TABLE
For information on the BKIN option, see Bilinear Kinematic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.6.1:
Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
205
! BISO TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1:
Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,0.015,30000
TBPT,,0.020,32000
TBPT,,0.025,33800
TBPT,,0.030,35000
TBPT,,0.040,36500
TBPT,,0.050,38000
TBPT,,0.060,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,PLAS,,,,MISO
TBPT,,0.00000,30000
TBPT,,4.00E-3,32000
TBPT,,8.10E-3,33800
TBPT,,1.25E-2,35000
TBPT,,2.18E-2,36500
TBPT,,3.10E-2,38000
TBPT,,4.05E-2,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
206
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,NLISO,1
TBDATA,1,30000,100000,5200,172
! NLISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,BKIN,1
TBDATA,1,9000,10000
! BKIN TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the BKIN option, see Bilinear Kinematic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
MPDATA,EX,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6
MPDATA,EY,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6
MPDATA,EZ,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6
MPDATA,PRXY,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377
MPDATA,GXY,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4
MPDATA,GYZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4
MPDATA,GXZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4
TB,MKIN,1,5,5
! MKIN TABLE
TBTEMP,,strain
TBDATA,1,0.0015,0.006,0.04,0.08,0.1
TBTEMP,20
TBDATA,1,45000,60000,90000,115000,120000
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
207
TB,HILL,1,5
! HILL TABLE
TBTEMP,20.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,400.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,650.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,800.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
TBTEMP,950.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the MKIN option, see Multilinear Kinematic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,KINH,1,,3
TBPT,,5E-5,1E3
TBPT,,0.01,2E3
TBPT,,0.60,6E4
! KINH TABLE
TB,HILL,1
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.90,0.95
! HILL TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the KINH option, see Multilinear Kinematic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,PLAS,,,,KINH
TBPT,,0.00000,1E3
TBPT,,9.90E-3,2E3
TBPT,,5.97E-1,6E4
! KINH TABLE
TB,HILL,1
208
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,180,400,3,0
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,180,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,180,200
! BISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
! HILL TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1:
Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,185,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
209
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,0.001,185
TBPT,,1.0,380
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
! HILL TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
8.4.2.31. HILL and PLAS (Multilinear Isotropic Hardening) and CHAB Example
In addition to the TB,MISO example (above), you can also use material plasticity.The multilinear isotropic
hardening option - TB,PLAS, , , ,MISO is combined with HILL anisotropic plasticity and Chaboche nonlinear kinematic hardening in the following example:
MP,EX,1,185E3
MP,NUXY,1,0.3
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,185,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TB,PLAS,,,,MISO
TBPT,,0.001,185
TBPT,,0.998,380
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
! HILL TABLE
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
210
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
TB,NLISO,1
TBDATA,1,180,0.0,100.0,5
! NLISO TABLE
!
TB,CHAB,1
TBDATA,1,180,100,3
! CHABOCHE TABLE
TB,HILL,1,5
TBTEMP,750.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,800.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,850.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,900.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
TBTEMP,950.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
! HILL TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
211
TB,BISO,1,
TBDATA,1,45000,760000
! BISO TABLE
TB,RATE,1,2,,PERZYNA
TBTEMP,20
TBDATA,1,0.1,0.3
TBTEMP,950
TBDATA,1,0.3,0.5
! RATE TABLE
TB,HILL,1,5
! HILL TABLE
TBTEMP,750.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,800.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,850.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,900.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
TBTEMP,950.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the RATE option, see Rate-Dependent Viscoplastic Materials in the Elements Reference, and
Section 8.4.1.8: Viscoplasticity in this chapter.
For information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1:
Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,0.015,30000
TBPT,,0.020,32000
TBPT,,0.025,33800
TBPT,,0.030,35000
TBPT,,0.040,36500
TBPT,,0.050,38000
TBPT,,0.060,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
! RATE TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
212
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,NLISO,1
TBDATA,1,30000,100000,5200,172
! NLISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1
! RATE TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the RATE option, see Rate-Dependent Viscoplastic Materials in the Elements Reference, and
Section 8.4.1.8: Viscoplasticity in this chapter.
For information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
213
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
TBDATA,1,5.911E-34,6.25,-0.25
! CREEP TABLE
TB,HILL,1,5
TBTEMP,750.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,800.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,850.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93
TBTEMP,900.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
TBTEMP,950.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
! HILL TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.6.1:
Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter.
214
TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,180,200
! BISO TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
TBDATA,1,5.911E-34,6.25,-0.25
! CREEP TABLE
TB,HILL,1,5
TBTEMP,750.0
! HILL TABLE
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.6.1:
Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter.
For information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1:
Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,MISO,1
TBPT,,0.015,30000
TBPT,,0.020,32000
TBPT,,0.025,33800
TBPT,,0.030,35000
TBPT,,0.040,36500
TBPT,,0.050,38000
TBPT,,0.060,39000
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
! CREEP TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.6.1:
Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter.
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,PLAS,1,,7,MISO
TBPT,,0.00000,30000
TBPT,,4.00E-3,32000
TBPT,,8.10E-3,33800
! MISO TABLE
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
215
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.6.1:
Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter.
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,NLISO,1
TBDATA,1,30000,100000,5200,172
! NLISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
TB,CREEP,1,,,2
! CREEP TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic
Material Options in this chapter.
For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.6.1:
Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter.
For information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,BKIN,1
TBDATA,1,42000,1000
! BKIN TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,6
TBDATA,1,7.4e-21,3.5,0,0,0,0
! CREEP TABLES
TB,HILL,1
! HILL TABLE
TBDATA,1,1.15,1.05,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.0
216
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
For information on hyperelasticity, see Hyperelastic Material Constants in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.4:
Hyperelasticity in this chapter.
For information on the viscoelasticity, see Viscoelastic Material Constants in the Elements Reference, and Section 8.4.1.9: Viscoelasticity in this chapter.
EQSLV
KBC
LNSRCH
LSWRITE
MONITOR
NEQIT
NROPT
NSUBST
OPNCONTROL
PRED
SSTIF
TINTP
These commands and the settings they control are discussed in later sections.You can also refer to the individual
command descriptions in the Commands Reference.
If you do choose to override the ANSYS-specified settings, or if you wish to use an input list from a previous release
of ANSYS, issue SOLCONTROL,OFF in the /SOLU phase. See the SOLCONTROL command description for more
details.
ANSYS' automatic solution control is active for the following analyses:
Single-field nonlinear or transient structural and solid mechanics analysis where the solution DOFs are
combinations of UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ.
Single-field nonlinear or transient thermal analysis where the solution DOF is TEMP.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
217
Note
The Solution Controls dialog box, which is described later in this chapter, cannot be used to set
solution controls for a thermal analysis. Instead, you must use the standard set of ANSYS solution
commands and the standard corresponding menu paths.
218
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
When setting ANTYPE and NLGEOM, choose Large Displacement Static if you are performing a new
analysis. (But, keep in mind that not all nonlinear analyses will produce large deformations. See Section 8.3:
Using Geometric Nonlinearities for further discussion of large deformations.) Choose Restart Current
Analysis if you want to restart a failed nonlinear analysis.You cannot change this setting after the first
load step (that is, after you issue your first SOLVE command).You will usually choose to do a new analysis,
rather than a restart. Restarts are discussed in the Basic Analysis Guide.
When working with time settings, remember that these options can be changed at any load step. See
Chapter 2: Loading in the Basic Analysis Guide for more information on these options. Advanced time/frequency options, in addition to those available on the Solution Controls dialog box, are discussed in Section 8.6.2.3: Advanced Load Step Options You Can Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box.
A nonlinear analysis requires multiple substeps (or time steps; the two terms are equivalent) within each
load step so that ANSYS can apply the specified loads gradually and obtain an accurate solution.The
NSUBST and DELTIM commands both achieve the same effect (establishing a load step's starting, minimum, and maximum step size), but by reciprocal means. NSUBST defines the number of substeps to be
taken within a load step, whereas DELTIM defines the time step size explicitly. If automatic time stepping
is off [AUTOTS], then the starting substep size is used throughout the load step.
OUTRES controls the data on the results file (Jobname.RST). By default, only the last substep is written
to the results file in a nonlinear analysis.
Only 1000 results sets (substeps) can be written to the results file, but you can use the command /CONFIG,NRES to increase the limit (see the Basic Analysis Guide).
8.6.2.2. Advanced Analysis Options You Can Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box
The following sections provide more detail about some of the advanced analysis options that you can set on the
Solution Controls dialog box.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
219
If it is a beam/shell or beam/shell and solid structure, choose the sparse direct solver.
If it is a 3-D solid structure and the number of DOF is relatively large (that is, 200,000 or more DOF), choose
the PCG solver.
If the problem is ill-conditioned (triggered by poor element shapes), or has a big difference in material
properties in different regions of the model, or has insufficient displacement boundary constraints, choose
the sparse direct solver.
8.6.2.3. Advanced Load Step Options You Can Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box
The following sections provide more detail about some of the advanced load step options that you can set on
the Solution Controls dialog box.
Number of equilibrium iterations used in the last time step (more iterations cause the time step size to
be reduced)
Predictions for nonlinear element status change (time step sizes are decreased when a status change is
imminent)
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Note
If you explicitly define any custom convergence criteria [CNVTOL], the entire default criteria will be
overwritten.Thus, if you define displacement convergence checking, you will have to redefine force
convergence checking. (Use multiple CNVTOL commands to define multiple convergence criteria.)
Using tighter convergence criteria will improve the accuracy of your results, but at the cost of more equilibrium
iterations. If you want to tighten (or loosen, which is not recommended) your criteria, you should change TOLER
by one or two orders of magnitude. In general, you should continue to use the default value of VALUE; that is,
change the convergence criteria by adjusting TOLER, not VALUE.You should make certain that the default value
of MINREF = 0.001 makes sense in the context of your analysis. If your analysis uses certain sets of units or has
very low load levels, you might want to specify a smaller value for MINREF.
Also, we do not recommend putting two or more disjointed structures into one model for a nonlinear analysis
because the convergence check tries to relate these disjointed structures, often producing some unwanted residual force.
Checking Convergence in a Single and Multi-DOF System
To check convergence in a single degree of freedom (DOF) system, you compute the force (and moment) imbalance for the one DOF, and compare this value against the established convergence criteria (VALUE*TOLER).
(You can also perform a similar check for displacement (and rotation) convergence for your single DOF.) However,
in a multi-DOF system, you might want to use a different method of comparison.
The ANSYS program provides three different vector norms to use for convergence checking:
The infinite norm repeats the single-DOF check at each DOF in your model.
The L1 norm compares the convergence criterion against the sum of the absolute values of force (and
moment) imbalance for all DOFs.
The L2 norm performs the convergence check using the square root sum of the squares of the force (and
moment) imbalances for all DOFs. (Of course, additional L1 or L2 checking can be performed for a displacement convergence check.)
Example
For the following example, the substep will be considered to be converged if the out-of-balance
force (checked at each DOF separately) is less than or equal to 5000*0.0005 (that is, 2.5), and if
the change in displacements (checked as the square root sum of the squares) is less than or equal
to 10*0.001 (that is, 0.01).
CNVTOL,F,5000,0.0005,0
CNVTOL,U,10,0.001,2
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
221
8.6.2.3.5. VT Accelerator
This option selects an advanced predictor-corrector algorithm based on Variational Technology to reduce the
overall number of iterations [STAOPT,VT for static analyses, TRNOPT,VT for transient].This option requires an
HPC license. It is applicable to analyses that include large deflection [NLGEOM], hyperelasticity, viscoelasticity,
and creep nonlinearities. Rate-independent plasticity and nonlinear contact analyses may not show any improvement in convergence rates; however, you may choose this option with these nonlinearities if you wish to rerun
the analysis with changes to the input parameters later.
222
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
8.6.3.1. Advanced Analysis Options You Cannot Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box
The following sections describe some advanced analysis options that you can set for your analysis. As noted
above in Section 8.6.3: Set Additional Solution Options, you cannot use the Solution Controls dialog box to set the
options described below. Instead, you must set them using the standard set of ANSYS solution commands and
the standard corresponding menu paths.
Program-chosen (NROPT,AUTO): The program chooses which of the options to use, based on the kinds
of nonlinearities present in your model. Adaptive descent will be automatically activated, when appropriate.
Full (NROPT,FULL): The program uses the full Newton-Raphson procedure, in which the stiffness matrix
is updated at every equilibrium iteration.
If adaptive descent is on (optional), the program will use the tangent stiffness matrix only as long as the
iterations remain stable (that is, as long as the residual decreases, and no negative main diagonal pivot
occurs). If divergent trends are detected on an iteration, the program discards the divergent iteration and
restarts the solution, using a weighted combination of the secant and tangent stiffness matrices. When
the iterations return to a convergent pattern, the program will resume using the tangent stiffness matrix.
Activating adaptive descent will usually enhance the program's ability to obtain converged solutions for
complicated nonlinear problems but is supported only for elements indicated under "Special Features"
in the Input Summary table (Table 4.n.1 for an element, where n is the element number) in the Elements
Reference.
Modified (NROPT,MODI):The program uses the modified Newton-Raphson technique, in which the tangent
stiffness matrix is updated at each substep.The matrix is not changed during equilibrium iterations at a
substep.This option is not applicable to large deformation analyses. Adaptive descent is not available.
Initial Stiffness (NROPT,INIT): The program uses the initial stiffness matrix in every equilibrium iteration.
This option can be less likely to diverge than the full option, but it often requires more iterations to achieve
convergence. It is not applicable to large deformation analyses. Adaptive descent is not available.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
223
Full with unsymmetric matrix (NROPT,UNSYM): The program uses the full Newton-Raphson procedure,
in which the stiffness matrix is updated at every equilibrium iteration. In addition, it generates and uses
unsymmetric matrices that you can use for any of the following:
If you are running a pressure-driven collapse analysis, an unsymmetric pressure load stiffness might
be helpful in obtaining convergence.You can include pressure load stiffness using SOLCONTROL,INCP.
If you are defining an unsymmetric material model using TB,USER, you would need NROPT,UNSYM
to fully use the property you defined.
If you are running a contact analysis, an unsymmetric contact stiffness matrix would fully couple the
sliding and the normal stiffnesses. See Section 3.8.4: Determining Contact Stiffness and Allowable Penetration in the Contact Technology Guide for details.
You should first try NROPT,FULL; then try NROPT,UNSYM if you experience convergence difficulties. Note
that using an unsymmetric solver requires more computer time to obtain a solution, than if you use a
symmetric solver.
If a multistatus element is in the model, however, it would be updated at the iteration in which it changes
status, irrespective of the Newton-Raphson option.
8.6.3.2. Advanced Load Step Options You Cannot Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box
The following sections describe some advanced load step options that you can set for your analysis. As noted
above in Section 8.6.3: Set Additional Solution Options, you cannot use the Solution Controls dialog box to set the
options described below. Instead, you must set them using the standard set of ANSYS solution commands and
the standard corresponding menu paths.
Note
If you do not want to include the effects of creep in your analysis, use the RATE command with Option = OFF, or set the time steps to be longer than the previous time step, but not more than 1.0e6 longer.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Note
Results tracking is not available with FLOTRAN analyses.
225
Note
Use MPCHG with caution. Changing material properties in a nonlinear analysis may produce unintended results, particularly if you change nonlinear [TB] material properties.
226
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
To review results in POST1, the database must contain the same model for which the solution was calculated.
2.
Verify from your output file (Jobname.OUT) whether or not the analysis converged at all load steps.
If not, you probably will not want to postprocess the results, other than to determine why convergence
failed.
Enter POST1. If your model is not currently in the database, issue RESUME.
Command(s): /POST1
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc
3.
Read in results for the desired load step and substep, which can be identified by load step and substep
numbers or by time. (Note, however, that arc-length results should not be identified by time.)
Command(s): SET
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> load step
You can also use the SUBSET or APPEND commands to read in or merge results data for selected portions
of the model only.The LIST argument on any of these commands lists the available solutions on the
results file.You can also limit the amount of data written from the results file to the database through
the INRES command. Additionally, you can use the ETABLE command to store result items for selected
elements. See the individual command descriptions in the Commands Reference for more information.
Caution
If you specify a TIME value for which no results are available, the ANSYS program performs
a linear interpolation to calculate the results at that value of TIME. Realize that this interpolation usually causes some loss of accuracy in a nonlinear analysis (see Figure 8.23,Linear Interpolation of Nonlinear Results Can Introduce Some Error).Therefore, for a nonlinear analysis,
you should usually postprocess at a TIME that corresponds exactly to the desired substep.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
227
Figure 8.20 Linear Interpolation of Nonlinear Results Can Introduce Some Error
Results
Time
4.
228
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Verify from your output file (Jobname.OUT) whether or not the analysis converged at all desired load
steps.You should not base design decisions on unconverged results.
2.
If your solution converged, enter POST26. If your model is not currently in the database, issue RESUME.
Command(s): /POST26
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro
3.
Define the variables to be used in your postprocessing session.The SOLU command will cause various
iteration and convergence parameters to be read into the database, where you can incorporate them
into your postprocessing.
Command(s): NSOL, ESOL, RFORCE
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables
4.
Other Capabilities
Many other postprocessing functions are available in POST26. See Chapter 6: The Time-History Postprocessor
(POST26) in the Basic Analysis Guide for details.
See the NLGEOM, SSTIF, NROPT, TIME, NSUBST, AUTOTS, KBC, CNVTOL, NEQIT, NCNV, PRED, OUTRES, and
SOLU command descriptions for more information.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
229
2.
Specify transient analysis type and define analysis options as you would for a nonlinear static analysis:
Large Displacement Transient (if using the Solution Controls dialog box to set analysis type)
Apply loads and specify load step options in the same manner as you would for a linear full transient
dynamic analysis. A transient load history usually requires multiple load steps, with the first load step
typically used to establish initial conditions (see the Basic Analysis Guide).The general, nonlinear, birth
and death, and output control options available for a nonlinear static analysis are also available for a
nonlinear transient analysis.
In a nonlinear transient analysis, time must be greater than zero. See Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis for procedures for defining nonzero initial conditions.
For a nonlinear transient analysis, you must specify whether you want stepped or ramped loads [KBC].
See the Basic Analysis Guide for further discussion about ramped vs. stepped loads.
You can also specify dynamics options: alpha and beta damping, time integration effects, and transient
integration parameters.
Command(s): ALPHAD, BETAD, TIMINT, TINTP
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Transient Tab)
Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Damping
Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time Integration
An explanation of the dynamics options follows.
Damping
Rayleigh damping constants are defined using the constant mass [ALPHAD] and stiffness [BETAD]
matrix multipliers. In a nonlinear analysis the stiffness may change drastically - do not use BETAD,
except with care. See Section 5.9.3: Damping for details about damping.
230
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Note
If you are using the Solution Controls dialog box to set solution controls, you can access all
of these options [ALPHAD, BETAD, KBC, TIMINT, TINTP, TRNOPT] on the Transient tab.
3.
Write load data for each load step to a load step file.
Command(s): LSWRITE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File
4.
5.
Start solution calculations. Other methods for multiple load steps are described in Chapter 1: Getting
Started with ANSYS in the Basic Analysis Guide.
Command(s): LSSOLVE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> From LS Files
6.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
231
See the ANTYPE, TRNOPT, LSWRITE, NLGEOM, SSTIF, NROPT, TIME, DELTIM, AUTOTS, KBC, ALPHAD, TIMINT,
CNVTOL, NEQIT, NCNV, PRED, OUTRES, LSSOLVE, and SOLU command descriptions for more information.
232
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
8.9. Restarts
Restart procedures for a transient analysis are essentially the same as for a static analysis; see Section 3.9:Restarting
an Analysis in the Basic Analysis Guide.
COMBIN7
COMBIN14
COMBIN37
COMBIN39
COMBIN40
LINK10
SHELL41
SOLID65
Nonlinear stabilization
A tool for dealing with local instabilities as well as global instability.You can use it together with nearly
any other nonlinear solution technique, such as line search and automatic time stepping (although not
with the arc-length method).
Arc-length method
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
233
Alternative methods are available to help achieve convergence. For example, you could apply displacements
instead of forces, or apply artificial stiffness (COMBIN37), to the unstable DOFs. However, such methods are
generally unreliable, sometimes impractical to use, or simply not applicable.
234
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
235
236
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
If the stabilization energy (which could be larger than that specified via the STABILIZE command) is much less
than the potential energy (for example, within a 1.0 percent tolerance), the result should be acceptable and there
should be no need to check the stabilization forces further.
When stabilization energy is large, check the stabilization forces at each DOF for all substeps. If the stabilization
forces are much smaller than the applied loads and reaction forces (for example, within a 0.5 percent tolerance),
the results are still acceptable. Such a case could occur when an elastic system is loaded first, then unloaded
significantly. It is possible that the final element potential energy is small and stabilization energy is relatively
large, but all stabilization forces are small. Currently, stabilization forces are accessible in the .OUT file (via
OUTPR ).
Even when both stabilization energy and forces are too large, the results could still be valid. Such a scenario is
possible when a large part of an elastic structure undergoes large rigid body motion (as in a snap-through simulation). In such a case, the stabilization energy could be large as well as the stabilization force for some DOFs at
some substeps, but the results could still be acceptably accurate. Nevertheless, consider the results along with
other support data and use your own discretion.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
237
where NSBSTP is the number of substeps specified via the NSUBST command.
When choosing the number of substeps, consider that more substeps result in a longer solution time. Ideally,
you want the minimum number of substeps required to produce an optimally efficient solution.You might have
to make an educated guess of the desired number of substeps, and adjust and re-analyze as needed.
When the arc-length method is active, do not use line search (LNSRCH), the predictor (PRED), adaptive descent
(NROPT,,,ON), automatic time stepping (AUTOTS, TIME, DELTIM), or time-integration effects (TIMINT). Likewise,
do not try to base convergence on displacement (CNVTOL,U); instead, use the force criteria (CNVTOL,F).
To help minimize the solution time, the maximum number of equilibrium iterations in a single substep (NEQIT)
should be less than or equal to 15.
If an arc-length solution fails to converge within the prescribed maximum number of iterations (NEQIT), the
program automatically bisects and continue the analysis. Bisection continues until a converged solution is obtained
or until the minimum arc-length radius is used. (The minimum radius is defined by NSBSTP (NSUBST) and
MINARC (ARCLEN).
In general, you cannot use this method to obtain a solution at a specified load or displacement value because
the value changes (along the spherical arc) as equilibrium is achieved. Figure 8.4,Traditional Newton-Raphson
Fa
Method vs. Arc-Length Method illustrates how the specified load 1 is used only as a starting point.The actual
load at convergence is somewhat less. Similarly, it can be difficult to determine a value of limiting load or deflection
238
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
See the Basic Analysis Guide for information about termination and restart procedures.
Use the load-deflection curve as a guide for evaluating and adjusting your analysis to help you achieve the desired
results. It is usually good practice to graph your load-deflection curve (using POST26 commands) with every
analysis.
Often, an unsuccessful arc-length analysis can be traced to an arc-length radius that is either too large or too
small.Driftback (where the analysis retraces its steps along the load-deflection curve) is a typical difficulty caused
by using a too large or too small arc-length radius.To better understand this problem, examine the load-deflection
curve; you can then adjust the arc-length radius size and range as needed (NSUBST and ARCLEN).
The total arc-length load factor (SOLU,,ALLF) can be either positive or negative. Similarly, TIME, which in an arclength analysis is related to the total arc-length load factor, can also be either positive or negative. Negative
values of ALLF or TIME indicate that the arc-length feature is applying load in the reverse direction in order to
maintain stability in the structure. Negative ALLF or TIME values are commonly seen in various snap-through
analyses.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
239
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
241
Elements contain nodes that have near zero pivots (nonlinear analyses)
Elements where mixed u-P constraints are not satisfied (mixed u-P option of 18x solid elements only)
ANSYS has default limits which, when exceeded, determine when convergence criteria have been violated. Some
limits are user-controlled; for example, the CUTCONTROL command sets the maximum plastic/creep strain increments allowed in an iteration. Other limits are fixed.
The NLDIAG,EFLG command identifies elements that violate the above criteria and records them in a file (Jobname.ndxxx).
242
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Note
Convergence problems may occur when material algorithms fail (e.g. local element level NewtonRaphson convergence failure, or extreme element distortion).The Ansys error message identifies
the corresponding element number and/or the material ID for these cases. Be sure to read any error
messages generated during solution.
Process the Tracked Results Issue the NLDPOST command to process the .ndxxx nonlinear diagnostics
files.The command creates components of elements that violate a certain criterion for a particular equilibrium
iteration (or iterations).
Identify contact pairs causing convergence difficulties Issue the NLDIAG,CONT command to write various
contact information for all defined contact pairs to a single Jobname.cnd text file.The file is written during
solution at a user-specified frequency (each iteration, substep, or load step).
Information stored in this file will help identify when and how contact occurs, determine the regions where
contact is unstable, and identify the corresponding contact parameters.You can then focus on the specific settings
for those particular contact pairs that need attention.
Monitor the Diagnostics Results in Real Time The NLHIST command allows you to monitor results of interest
in real time during solution. Before starting the solution, you can request nodal data such as displacements or
reaction forces at specific nodes.You can also request element nodal data such as stresses and strains at specific
elements to be graphed. Pair-based contact data are also available.The result data are written to a file named
Jobname.nlh.
For example, a reaction force-deflection curve could indicate when possible buckling behavior occurs. Nodal
results and contact results are monitored at every converged substep while element nodal data are written as
specified via the OUTRES setting.
You can also track results during batch runs. Either access the ANSYS Launcher and select File Tracking from
the Tools menu, or type nlhist110 at the command line. Use the supplied file browser to navigate to your
Jobname.nlh file, and click on it to invoke the tracking utility.You can use this utility to read the file at any
time, even after the solution is complete (the data in the file must be formatted correctly).
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
243
Figure 8.21 Convergence Norms Displayed By the Graphical Solution Tracking (GST)
Feature
Problems that have only localized dynamic behavior (for example, turbine blade and hub assemblies) in
which the low-frequency energy content of the system could dominate the high-frequency areas.
Problems with short ramp times on some of their loads. If the time step size is allowed to become too
large, ramped portions of the load history may be inaccurately characterized.
Problems that include structures that are continuously excited over a range of frequencies (for example,
seismic problems).
Exercise caution when modeling kinematic structures (systems with rigid-body motions).These following
guidelines can usually help you to obtain a good solution:
Incorporate significant numerical damping (0.05 < < 0.1 on the TINTP command) into the solution to
filter out the high frequency noise, especially if a coarse time step is used. Do not use -damping (mass
matrix multiplier, ALPHAD command) in a dynamic kinematic analysis, as it will dampen the rigid body
motion (zero frequency mode) of the system.
Avoid imposed displacement history specifications, because imposed displacement input has (theoretically)
infinite jumps in acceleration, which causes stability problems for the Newmark time-integration algorithm.
If you are analyzing a "flimsy" structure which exhibits increasing stiffness (such as a fishing pole).
If you notice (from the program output messages) oscillatory convergence patterns.
244
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
In some cases, you can use imposed displacements instead of applied forces.This approach can be used
to start a static analysis closer to the equilibrium position, or to control displacements through periods
of unstable response (for example, snap-through or postbuckling).
Another technique that can be effective in circumventing problems due to initial instability is running a
static problem as a "slow dynamic" analysis (that is, using time-integration effects in an attempt to prevent
the solution from diverging in any one load step).
You can also apply temporary artificial stiffness to unstable DOFs, using control elements (such as COMBIN37), or using the birth and death option on other elements.The idea here is to artificially restrain the
system during intermediate load steps in order to prevent unrealistically large displacements from being
calculated. As the system displaces into a stable configuration, the artificial stiffness is removed.
245
Load step
summary
table
Load step 2
substep 1
L O A D
*****
CP=
13.891
TIME= 11:09:22
to 1 (full Newton-Raphson solution
S T E P
O P T I O N S
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
. 200.00
.
ON
.
100
. 10000
.
10
.
15
.
NO
.YES (EXIT)
.USE DEFAULTS
.NO PRINTOUT
246
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Substep
summary
SUBSTEP
3 COMPLETED.
TIME INC =
1.50000
CUM ITER =
13
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
247
The plate has a dead load acting as a uniform pressure of 0.125N/m2.The history of the cyclic point load is shown
here:
Time
1
-0.0100
248
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Clamped
2.
3.
Click on OK.
4.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Change Jobname.The Change Jobname dialog box appears.
5.
Type the text axplate in the entry box and click OK.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
In the scroll box for element behavior, scroll to "Axisymmetric" and select it.
8.
Click on OK.
9.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models.The Define Material Model Behavior dialog box appears.
2.
In the Material Models Available window, double-click on the icons next to the following options:
Structural, Linear, Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears.
3.
4.
5.
Click on OK. Material Model Number 1 appears in the Material Models Defined window on the left.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
249
In the Material Models Available window, double-click on the following options: Nonlinear, Inelastic,
Rate Independent, Kinematic Hardening Plasticity, von Mises Plasticity, Multilinear (General). A dialog
box appears.
2.
Enter the following Strain/Stress value pair in the table: 0.001123514, 19.00
3.
Click on the Add Point button, and enter the next Strain/Stress value pair: 0.001865643, 22.80
4.
Repeat the previous step to enter the following Strain/Stress value pairs: 0.002562402, 25.08; 0.004471788,
29.07; 0.006422389, 31.73.
5.
Click on OK.
6.
Choose menu path Material> Exit to remove the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Graphs> Modify Axes.The Axes Modifications for
Graph Plots dialog box appears.
2.
3.
Enter True Stress for the Y-axis label and click OK.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models.The Define Material Model Behavior dialog box appears.
5.
In the Material Models Defined window, double-click in Material Model Number 1, and Multilinear Kinematic (General).The dialog box appears that includes the Strain/Stress data pairs that you entered.
6.
Click on the Graph button. A graph of the data table values appears in the Graphics window. If necessary,
revise the stress/strain values and click on the Graph button again. Repeat revisions and graphing as
needed until you are satisfied with the graphed results. Click on OK.
7.
Choose menu path Material> Exit to remove the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box.
8.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters.The Scalar Parameters dialog box
appears.
2.
Type "radius=1.0" in the Selection field and click Accept.This value is the radius of the plate.
3.
Type "thick=0.1" in the Selection field and click Accept.This value is the thickness of the plate. Click Close.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Areas> Rectangle> By Dimensions.The Create Rectangle by Dimensions dialog box appears.
5.
6.
Enter "0, thick" for Y-coordinates and click on OK. A rectangle appears in the ANSYS Graphics window.
7.
250
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> MeshTool.The MeshTool dialog box appears.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Click Size Controls> Lines> Set.The Element Size on Picked Lines picking menu appears. Click on the
two vertical lines (2 and 4). Click OK on the picking menu.The Element Sizes on Picked Lines dialog box
appears.
3.
4.
Repeat these steps (1-3), but choose horizontal lines 1 and 3, and specify 40 element divisions.
On the MeshTool, pick Quad and Map, then click MESH.The Mesh Areas picking menu appears.
2.
3.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options.
The Static or Steady-State Analysis dialog box appears.
2.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results File.The
Controls for Database and Results File Writing dialog box appears.
4.
Verify that All items are selected, and choose Every substep for the File write frequency. Click OK.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters.The Scalar Parameters dialog box
appears.
2.
3.
Type "nright = node(radius,0.0,0.0)" in the Selection field and click Accept, then Close.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Nonlinear> Monitor.The Monitor picking
menu appears.
5.
Type "ntop" in the picker and press RETURN. Click OK in the picking menu.The Monitor dialog box appears.
6.
In the scroll box for Quantity to be monitored, scroll to "UY" and select it. Click OK.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Nonlinear> Monitor.The Monitor picking
menu appears.
8.
Type "nright" in the picker and press RETURN. Click OK in the picking menu.The Monitor dialog box appears.
9.
In the scroll box for Variable to redefine, scroll to "Variable 2" and select it. In the scroll box for Quantity
to be monitored, scroll to "FY" and select it. Click OK.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities.The Select Entities dialog box appears.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
251
Select Nodes and By Location in the first two selection boxes.Verify that X coordinates are selected, and
enter "radius" in the Min, Max field. Click OK.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement> On
Nodes.The Apply U,ROT on Nodes picking menu appears.
4.
5.
6.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities.The Select Entities dialog box appears. Verify that
Nodes, By Location, and X coordinates are selected. Enter "0" in the Min, Max field and click OK.This will
select the nodes at the X=0 position.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement> On
Nodes.The Apply U,ROT on Nodes picking menu appears.
8.
9.
Click on "UX" for DOFs to be constrained. Click on All DOF to deselect it.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time and Substps.
The Time and Substep Options dialog appears.
2.
Enter 10 as the number of substeps, enter 50 as the maximum number of substeps, and enter 5 as the
minimum number of substeps. Click OK.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the information in the /STAT
window, and click on Close.
4.
5.
Click on Close on the Information dialog box when the solution is done.
6.
Choose Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters.The Scalar Parameters dialog box appears.
2.
Enter "f = 0.010" in the Selection field and click on Accept. Click on Close.
3.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time and Substps.
The Time and Substep Options dialog appears.
252
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Enter "4" for the number of substeps, "25" for the maximum number of substeps, and "2" for the minimum
number of substeps. Click OK.
5.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Force/Moment> On
Nodes.The Apply F/M on Nodes picking menu appears.
6.
Enter "ntop" in the picker and press RETURN. Click OK in the Apply F/M on Nodes picking menu.The
Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears.
7.
Select "FY" in the Direction of force/mom selection box. Enter "-f" in the Force/moment value field. Click
OK.
8.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the information in the /STAT
window, and click on Close.
9.
10. Click on Close on the Information dialog box when the solution is done.
11. Repeat Steps 5-10, entering "f" in the Force/moment value field at Step 7.
12. Repeat Steps 5-11 two more times, for a total of three cycles (six substeps).
13. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> List> Files> Other.The List File dialog box appears. Select the axplate.mntr file and click on OK.
2.
Review the time step size, vertical displacement, and reaction force evolution over the entire solution.
3.
Click Close.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> Last Set.
2.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape.The Plot Deformed
Shape dialog box appears.
3.
Click on Def + undef edge for items to be plotted. Click OK.The deformed mesh appears in the ANSYS
Graphics window.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Element Solu.The
Contour Element Solution Data dialog box appears.
5.
In the selection box on the left, choose Strain-plastic. In the selection box on the right, choose Eqv plastic
EPEQ. Click OK.The contour plot appears in the Graphics window.
6.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities.The Select Entities dialog box appears.
2.
Verify that Nodes and By Num/Pick are selected in the first two boxes. Click OK.The Select nodes picking
menu appears.
3.
4.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities.The Select Entities dialog box appears. Choose Elements in the first drop-down selection box. Choose Attached to in the second drop-down selection box.
Verify that Nodes is selected. Click OK.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
253
6.
Choose Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables.The Defined Time-History Variables dialog
box appears. Click on Add.The Add Time-History Variable dialog box appears.
7.
Click on Element results. Click OK.The Define Elemental Data picking menu appears.
8.
Click on the top left element in the ANSYS Graphics window. Click OK on the picking menu.The Define
Nodal Data picking menu appears.
9.
Click on the top left node of the top left element. Click OK on the picking menu.The Define Element
Results Variable dialog box appears.
Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> Graph.The Graph Settings dialog box
appears.
2.
Click on Single variable for the X-axis variable and enter 5 as the single variable number. Click OK.
3.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Graphs> Modify Axes.The Axes Modifications for
Graph Plots dialog box appears.
4.
5.
6.
Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables.The Graph Time-History Variables
dialog box appears.
7.
2.
254
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
255
amesh,all
CMDEL,_Y
CMDEL,_Y1
CMDEL,_Y2
fini
/solve
nlgeom,on! Turn on geometric nonlinearity
! Get the node numbers for the nodes located at the top
! of the axis of symmetry and at bottom right of the model
ntop = node(0,thick,0)
nright = node(radius,0,0)
! Activate the monitoring of the displacement and reaction force histories
! during the analysis. This will be written out to the monitor file ratch.mntr
monitor,1,ntop,uy
monitor,2,nright,fy
outres,all,all
! Select the nodes located at right end and constrain their radial (x) and
! axial (y) direction displacement to be zero.
nsel,s,loc,x,radius
d,all,all
! Select the nodes located at left end and constrain their radial (x) direction
! displacement to be zero.
nsel,s,loc,x,0.0
d,all,ux,0.0
! Define the load for Load Step 1.
! Select the nodes located at top surface of plate and apply a uniform pressure
! of 0.125 N/m^2 as dead load on the plate.
nsel,s,loc,y,thick
sf,all,pres,0.125
alls! Select all nodes
! Define the number of substeps (10). Also define maximum number of
! substeps (50), and the minimum number of substeps (5) for the automatic
! time stepping algorithm.
nsub,10,50,5
solve
f = 0.01
! Over six load steps apply a cyclic point load of magnitude f = 0.01 units
! applied at the center of the plate over three cycles
! Start Cycle 1
! ---------------nsel,s,node,,ntop
f,all,fy,-f
nsel,all
nsubst,4,25,2
256
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
solve
nsel,s,node,,ntop
f,all,fy,f
nsel,all
nsubst,4,25,2
solve
! Start Cycle 2
! ---------------nsel,s,node,,ntop
f,all,fy,-f
nsel,all
nsubst,4,25,2
solve
nsel,s,node,,ntop
f,all,fy,f
nsel,all
nsubst,4,25,2
solve
! Start Cycle 3
! ---------------nsel,s,node,,ntop
f,all,fy,-f
nsel,all
nsubst,4,25,2
solve
nsel,s,node,,ntop
f,all,fy,f
nsel,all
nsubst,4,25,2
solve
save
fini
/post1
set,last
! (final state)
pldi,2
ples,nl,epeq
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
fini
/post26
eplo
nsel,s,node,,ntop
esln
elem=elnext(0)
alls
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
257
258
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
259
5
6
Case 1 - Totally Incompressible Models (see Table 9.1,Experimental Details for Case 1 and 2 Models and
Blatz-Ko)
Case 2 - Nearly Incompressible Models (see Table 9.1,Experimental Details for Case 1 and 2 Models and
Blatz-Ko)
Case 3 - Compressible Models (see Table 9.2,Experimental Details for Case 3 Models)
The types of data required for each of these cases is defined in the tables below.
Table 9.1 Experimental Details for Case 1 and 2 Models and Blatz-Ko
Experimental Type
Uniaxial Test
Biaxial Test
Planar/Shear Test
Simple Shear Test
Volumetric Test
260
Column 1
Engineering Strain
Engineering Strain
Engineering Strain (in
loading direction)
Engineering Shear
Strain
Column 2
Engineering Stress
Engineering Stress
Engineering Stress
Column 3
Engineering Shear
Stress
Hydrostatic Pressure
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Column 2
Lateral Direction Engineering
Strain
Engineering Strain
Engineering Strain (in thickness
direction)
Engineering Strain (in load- Engineering Strain (in thickness
ing direction)
direciton)
Engineering Shear Strain Engineering Shear Stress
Volumetric Test
Biaxial Test
Shear Test
Column 1
Engineering Strain
Column 3
Engineering Stress
Engineering Stress
Engineering Stress
(Optional) Engineering Normal Stress
(normal to the edge
of shear stress)
Hydrostatic Pressure
Note
J is the ratio of current volume to the original volume.
All stresses output by ANSYS in POST1/POST26 are true stresses and logarithmic strains.
60.00
118.2
175.2
231.1
For temperature dependent curve fitting, specify your temperature values at the top of the experimental data
using the
/temp,value
line.This header format specifies the attribute (temp) and its value (100). An example of a typical data input using
these attributes follows:
/temp,100
0.9703 60.00
0.9412 118.2
0.9127 175.2
0.8847 231.1
Adding this header introduces a temperature attribute of 100 degrees.You can add additional data sets at other
temperatures, in additional files. One file can have data at only one temperature.
9.2.1.2.1. Batch
TBFT,EADD,ID,Option1,Option2,Option3,Option4
261
9.2.1.2.2. GUI
The Material Properties GUI provides an input field where you can type in the filename of your data file, and also
include the appropriate path.You can also browse to a file in a specified location. Separate input is performed
for each Option1 value (UNIA, BIAX, SHEA, etc.).
Abbreviation
Order/Options
Mooney-Rivlin
moon
Polynomial
poly
Yeoh
yeoh
Neo-Hookean
neoh
Ogden
ogde
Arruda-Boyce
boyc
Gent
gent
Blatz-Ko
blat
Ogden Hyper-foam foam
2, 3, 5, 9
1 to N
1 to N
1 to N
1 to N
No. of Coefficients
[1]
2/3/5/9+1
see below [2]
N+N
1+1
2*N+N
2+1
2+1
1
2*N+N
Linear/Nonlinear Fitting
Linear
Linear
Linear
Linear
Nonlinear
Nonlinear
Nonlinear
Nonlinear
Nonlinear
1.
The number of coefficients is usually the sum of the number of deviatoric coefficients and the number
of volumetric coefficients.
2.
The number of coefficients for a polynomial will be dependent on the polynomial order N.
Number of Coefficients =
(1 + i) + N
i =1
Blatz-Ko and Ogden hyper-foam are compressible models. For Ogden hyper-foam, the experimental data you
supply will require additional fields.
More information on the hyperelastic models ANSYS supplies for curve fitting can be found in Section 2.5.3: Hyperelastic Material Constants.
9.2.1.3.1. Batch
TBFT,FADD,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3
Option2 = model name, as specified in Table 9.3,Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above)
Option3 = order or number of coefficients, where applicable. Table 9.3,Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model
Types (above) specifies the number and type of coefficient(s) necessary for each hyperelastic model type.
262
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
9.2.1.3.2. GUI
A pull-down selection menu in the material GUI allows you to pick the applicable material model option.The
options displayed will be dependent on the format of your experimental data file.
9.2.1.4.1. Batch
TBFT,SET,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = model name (see Table 9.3,Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above) for the available
models)
Option3 = order, if applicable
Option4 = index of coefficient
Option5 = value of the coefficient
To set Option4 for a reference temperature, or for temperature dependency:
TBFT,SET,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = model name. See Table 9.3,Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above) for the available
models.
Option3 = order, if applicable
Option4 = tdep or tref
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
263
Option2 = model name See Table 9.3,Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above) for the available
models.
Option3 = not applicable
Option4 = index of coefficient
Option5 = 1 for fixed and 0 to vary
9.2.1.4.2. GUI
The GUI automatically updates your coefficient tables depending on the model you pick.You can modify individual coefficients to initialize them at values you believe are more appropriate.
number of iterations
2.
residual tolerance
3.
The solution stops when both the residual tolerance and the coefficient change tolerance of your error norm
are met, or if the number of iterations criteria is met.When you use nonlinear regression, you must initialize your
coefficients.
9.2.1.5.1. Batch
TBFT,SOLVE,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4, ..., Option7
Option2 = model name. See Table 9.3,Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above) for the models
available.
Option3 = order or number of your coefficients. See Table 9.3,Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above)
for possible values.
Option4 = curve fitting procedure: 0 = unnormalized least squares, 1 = normalized least squares
Option5 = maximum number of iterations
Option6 = tolerance of residual changes
Option7 = tolerance of coefficient changes
Other solution parameters are available. See the TBFT command for details.
9.2.1.5.2. GUI
The GUI lets you specify all of your control parameters (error norm, solution control parameters, and the solver
options) interactively.You select the appropriate options from the provided menus, and solve to generate the
coefficients.You can change the parameters and repeat the solution as necessary to ensure an accurate result.
The unused options are disabled whenever necessary.
264
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
9.2.1.6.1. Batch
TBFT,PLOT,ID,Option1,HYPER,Option3,Option4
9.2.1.6.2. GUI
Use the GRAPH button to plot the data.Your plots will show columns 2 and above as separate curves, plotted
as a function of column 1.The data in column 1 is always the X-axis. By default, all the experiments are plotted
in the GUI window.To view specific data and its corresponding fitting result, you can click the right mouse button
(RMB) on the specific data set, and pick a desired option to view the results. Other RMB plotting utilities can be
found for different data fields in the curve fitting GUI window.
Use RMB functions to Zoom, Fit, Save Plot to File, View/Hide Legend and View/Hide Grid.Two or more fitted
functions can also be compared in the same plot. For example, you can view Mooney2 Uniaxial and Mooney9
Uniaxial plots directly on top of each other, provided you have already solved for both of these functions. RMB
also allows you to set the number of points used to generate the plot, and also change the minimum X value
and the maximum X value in a plot.You can also hide a particular curve within a graph, turn the legend and/or
axis displays on and off, and switch the scales between log scale and regular scale. Use the middle-mouse button
to eliminate a specific curve and clarify or refine the remaining curve.
9.2.1.6.3. Review/Verify
The two factors you consider in determining results acceptability are visual fit and the error norm/residual values.
When you plot the curve, the error norm/residual values are printed in the curve fitting GUI window. Error norm
values help you determine the quality of curve fitting and whether to accept the results, but are not always the
best indicator of a valid curve fit. Plotting the curves and visually assessing the result is usually the best indication.
If the results are unacceptable, you may want to go back to step 3 and solve again, either by picking a different
model, increasing the order, or redefining your initial values of the coefficients or other control parameters.You
can continue to use your original experimental data, repeating step 3 through step 7 until you get an acceptable
solution.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
265
9.2.1.7.1. Batch
TBFT,FSET,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3
Option2 = model name. See Table 9.3,Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above) for the models
available.
Option3 = order or number of your coefficients. See Table 9.3,Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types (above)
for possible values.
9.2.1.7.2. GUI
Once you complete the process and update your material data properties with the representative curve data,
you are returned to the material properties dialog.The curve data can now be accessed for the full range of
material behavior.
266
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
When a particular column is unchanged over the loading history, you can define it as an attribute. For instance,
in the above example, the stress and temperature are constant throughout the range.You define this data as
an attribute.
The header format to define a data attribute is /attr, value, where attr is the data-type abbreviation, and value is
the value of the attribute.The constant stress and temperature values above can be written into the file header,
as follows:
/seqv,4000 ! indicate this creep has a constant stress of 4000
/temp,100 ! indicate this creep data is at a constant temperature of 100
/1,creq ! indicate first column is creep strain
/2,dcreq ! indicate second column is creep strain rate
0.00215869 0.000203055
0.00406109 0.000181314
0.00664691 0.000165303
0.0102068 0.000152217
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
267
ANSYS provides thirteen model types for creep curve fitting.The model you choose will determine the experimental data required for the curve fitting process.The following table describes the creep data required to perform
curve fitting for each model type. Note that for strain hardening and modified strain hardening, you need to input
both creep strain and creep strain rate in the experimental data.
creq
x
x
x
dcreq
x
x
x
x
x
time
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
seqv
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
temp
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
9.3.1.2.1. Batch
The EADD argument of the TBFT command is used to identify and specify the location of your data files.The
command syntax is:
TBFT,EADD,ID,Option1,Option2,Option3,Option4
Option1 = creep
Option2 = name of file containing experimental data
Option3 = file name extension
Option4 = file directory
9.3.1.2.2. GUI
In interactive mode, you can input experimental data by typing the filename (with the appropriate path if the
file is not in the default directory) into the appropriate area.You can also browse to a file in a particular location.
Use the Add Data Set button to add additional data sets for creep curve fitting.There is no restriction on the
number of data sets you can add.
268
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
9.3.1.3.1. Batch
TBFT,FADD,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3
Option2 = creep model abbreviation. See Table 9.6,Creep Models and Abbreviations.
Option3 = not used for creep curve fitting.
The following table describes the creep models available and their abbreviated names for Option2 (above).
Name
Strain Hardening
Time Hardening
Generalized Exponential
Generalized Graham
Generalized Blackburn
Modified Time Hardening
Modified Strain Hardening
Generalized Garofalo
Exponential Form
Norton
Prim+Sec Time Hardening
Prim+Sec Rational Polynomial
Generalized Time Hardening
Fitting Name/Option2
shar
thar
gexp
ggra
gbla
mtha
msha
ggar
expo
nort
psth
psrp
gtha
Note
The experimental data must be consistent with the creep model you choose. See Table 9.5,Creep
Model and Data/Type Attribute for the data types required for each creep model.
9.3.1.3.2. GUI
You can pick the appropriate model option from a menu in the data entry area. All of the options and constraints
listed for batch input apply.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
269
9.3.1.4.1. Batch
You define your coefficient values and temperature dependency using the SET option of the TBFT command,
as follows:
TBFT,SET,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
9.3.1.4.2. GUI
The models listed in Table 9.6,Creep Models and Abbreviations are available directly from the GUI. When you
pick a model from the choices, ANSYS automatically configures the coefficients for the model.You can then
make modifications, including initializing and/or fixing certain coefficients.
9.3.1.5.1. Batch
The batch command is:
TBFT,SOLVE,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4, ..., Option7
Option2 = creep function name (See Table 9.6,Creep Models and Abbreviations)
Option3 = not applicable for creep models
Option4 = error norm: 0 = unnormalized, 1 = normalized (default)
Option5 = maximum number of iterations
Option6 = tolerance of residual changes
Option7 = tolerance of coefficient changes
Other solving parameters are available. See the TBFT command for details.
9.3.1.5.2. GUI
After you fill in the last set of coefficient values, the analysis moves automatically to the solution phase. Each of
the options specified in the command line description is presented as a pull down menu or fill in box, and each
option must be specified before Solve will begin.The coefficients are updated in the GUI after the solution is
complete.
271
9.3.1.6.1. Batch
TBFT,PLOT,ID,Option1,Option2,Option3,Option4
Option1 = CREEP
Option3 = creep model name
Option4 = not used
9.3.1.6.2. GUI
You can simultaneously display many data sets for each function plotted. Each window of your display can be
used to display each one of the data sets you are plotting against column one.
9.3.1.7.1. Batch
TBFT,FSET,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3
9.3.1.7.2. GUI
When you complete the process, click the Write to Database button to write the fitted coefficients of your creep
model as a creep data table in ANSYS material database.You are then returned to the material properties dialog.
The curve data can now be accessed for the full range of material behavior.
272
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Notes
Strain hardening has 4 coefficients, with C4 dedicated to temperature
dependency. If you do not have temperature dependent data, set C4 to
zero. If you have difficulty solving temperature dependent data, use
experimental data for only one temperature and fix C4 to zero. Solve,
and then add data for your other temperatures.Then release C4 and
solve for all coefficients.You can also solve for just C4 by fixing the C1,
C2 and C3 values.
Time Hardening
Time hardening has 4 coefficients, with C4 dedicated to temperature
dependency. If you do not have temperature dependent data, set C4 to
zero. If you have difficulty solving temperature dependent data, use
experimental data for only one temperature and fix C4 to zero. Solve,
and then add data for your other temperatures.Then release C4 and
solve for all coefficients.You can also solve for just C4 by fixing the C1,
C2 and C3 values.
Generalized Exponential
Generalized exponential has 5 coefficients, with C4 dedicated to temperature dependency. If you do not have temperature dependent data, set
C4 to zero. Use a low value for C5 (e.g., 1e-3) to avoid floating-point
overflows in the exponential term. If you have difficulty solving for
temperature dependent data, use experimental data for only one temperature, fix C4 to zero, then solve.Then add data for your other temperatures, release C4 and solve for all coefficients.You can also solve for
just C4 by fixing C1, C2 and C3.
Generalized Graham
Generalized Graham has 8 coefficients.You use C8 for temperature dependency. If you do not have temperature dependent data, set C8 to
zero. If you have difficulty solving temperature dependent data, use
experimental data for only one temperature, fix C8 to zero, and solve.
Then add data for other temperatures, release C8 and solve for the remaining coefficients individually.
Generalized Blackburn
Generalized Blackburn has 7 coefficients. It is advisable to look at the
exponential terms and try to keep them from floating-point overflows.
To keep eC2 within floating-point range, make sure the initial value of
C2 is such that C2 is close to 1. Similarly try to keep /C4 and C7 close
to 1.
Modified Time Hardening Modified time hardening has 4 coefficients. C4 is for temperature dependency. If you do not have temperature dependent data, fix C4 to
zero.
Modified Strain Hardening Modified Strain Hardening has 3 coefficients.This model can be complex
8 Generalized Garofalo
9 Exponential Form
C3
C2
for curve fitting.To keep the C1 [(C3 + 1)] term from going
negative, C1 is replaced with C12 but converted to the proper form before
beings written to the ANSYS database.
Generalized Garofalo has 4 coefficients, with C4 dedicated to temperature
dependency. If you do not have temperature dependent data, set C4 to
zero. To keep the Sinh term within floating-point range, keep c2 close
to one when you initialize the coefficients.
Exponential form has 3 coefficients, with C3 dedicated to temperature
dependency. If you do not have temperature dependent data, set C3 to
zero.To keep eC2 within floating-point range, keep /C2 close to one.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
273
Notes
Norton model has 3 coefficients, with C3 dedicated to temperature dependency. If you do not have temperature dependent data, set C3 to
zero.
11 Prim+Sec Time Hardening Time hardening has 7 coefficients.This is a complex model. Here it is
advisable to solve for temperature independent data first and then introduce temperature related data.
12 Prim+Sec Rational Polynomi- Rational polynomial is a very complex model for curve fitting, with 10
al
coefficients. If you find it hard to fit this data, it is advisable that you split
the experimental data into primary creep data and secondary creep
data. Primary creep data is the initial part of the curve that covers the
nonlinearity in the strain rate. Fit only the secondary data by fixing C1
to 1 and then set all other coefficients except C2, C3 and C4 to zero. Use
a low value of C3 to keep 10C3 within floating-point range. Coefficients
C5 to C10 in curve fitting refers to coefficients C7 to C12 in the implicit
creep equation.Then add the primary creep data, release all coefficients,
and solve.
13 Generalized Time Hardening Generalized time hardening has 6 coefficients. Set C6 to zero if you have
temperature independent data. When initializing coefficients set C5
close to 1 to avoid floating-point overflows.
9.4.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine the Coefficients of Viscoelastic Material Model
The steps for Viscoelastic Curve Fitting are defined as follows:
1 Section 9.4.1.1: Prepare Experimental The experimental data must be a plain text file delimited by a
Data
space or a comma.
2 Section 9.4.1.2: Input the Data into The experimental data can be read into ANSYS from the GUI or
ANSYS
via batch commands, as a plain text file.
3 Section 9.4.1.3:Select a Material Model This includes Prony series expansion of shear and/or bulk moduli
Option
as well as shift function.The supported shift functions include
WLF and TN.
4 Section 9.4.1.4: Initialize the Coeffi- Viscoelastic curve fitting is a nonlinear regression; the initial
value of your coefficients is very important for a successful
cients
solution.
5 Section 9.4.1.5: Specify Control Para- Specify the error norm to be used, the solution control parametmeters and Solve
ers, and perform the nonlinear regression.
6 Section 9.4.1.6: Plot the Experimental Graphically view the curve fitting results. Review and verify the
Data and Analyze
results by comparing them with the experimental data and the
regression errors. If any factor is not acceptable, repeat steps 3
to 7 to obtain a new curve fitting solution.
274
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
9.4.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine the Coefficients of Viscoelastic Material Model
7 Section 9.4.1.7: Write Data to TB Com- Write your curve fitting results in TB command format to the
mand
ANSYS database.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
275
9.4.1.2.1. Batch
TBFT,EADD,ID,Option1,Option2,Option3,Option4
Note
sdec refers to the shear modulus as a function of time and bdec refers to the bulk modulus as a
function of time.
9.4.1.2.2. GUI
Click on the Add Dataset button and type the filename into the area provided.You can also browse to a file in
a specified location. Separate input is performed for each data type (Option1 = sdec, or bdec)
9.4.1.3.1. Batch
You define a viscoelastic material with the Prony series expansion by creating a case and setting the order of
shear modulus, bulk modulus, and shift options.You create the case with the TBFT, FCASE command.The first
276
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
9.4.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine the Coefficients of Viscoelastic Material Model
line will include FCASE, ID, NEW.Then you specify the number of shear terms, bulk terms, and the shift function.
The case is actually created only after the option is issued.The following syntax examples and argument descriptions illustrate the relationship of these activities.
TBFT,FCASE,ID,NEW,Option2,Option3
CATEGORY = VISCO
Option2 = pshear or pbulk or shift
Option3 = dependent on Option2 as follows:
9.4.1.3.2. GUI
You can use the GUI to interactively navigate the tree structure of the curve fitting window. Each of the shear,
bulk and shift options can be selected, and you can fill in the appropriate casename in a text box field. As you
choose the options, the coefficient table is automatically created.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
277
9.4.1.4.1. Batch
TBFT,SET,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = casename
Option3 = not applicable
Option4 = index of coefficient
Option5 = value of coefficient
For example:
TBFT,SET,1, myvisco1,,1,1.2 ! Initialize the first coefficient to 1.2
TBFT,SET,1, myvisco1,,2,1.5 ! Initialize the second coefficient to 1.5
Use the TBFT,FIX command to fix a coefficient to a value set by the TBFT, SET command or to release a previously
fixed coefficient. By default, coefficients are not fixed.
TBFT,FIX,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = casename
Option3 = not applicable
Option4 = index of coefficient
Option5 = 1 to fix, 0 to vary
For example:
TBFT,FIX,1, myvisco1,,1,1.! Fix the first coefficient to a value set via TBFT,SET
TBFT,FIX,1, myvisco1,,2,1 ! Fix the second coefficient to a value set via TBFT,SET
Temperature dependency uses Option4, and references data files you entered with the appropriate temp
header.
TBFT,SET,ID,VISCO,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = model name. See Table 9.7,Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations (above) for the models
available.
Option3 = not applicable
Option4 = tdep or tref
Option5 = If Option 4 = tdep, then 1 turns temperature dependency on and 0 turns it off. If Option
4 = tref, this value will be a specific temperature, or all.
278
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
9.4.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine the Coefficients of Viscoelastic Material Model
9.4.1.4.2. GUI
The coefficients table is automatically updated in the viscoelastic curve fitting GUI window when the order of
shear modulus and/or bulk modulus and/or shift function are defined. Specify values for your coefficients in the
coefficients table in the curve fitting GUI window, and check the appropriate boxes to fix them or allow them to
vary.
2.
3.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
279
Note
For GUI operations, when only the shear and bulk buttons are checked, only your shear coefficients
are solved.To solve for both shear and bulk, you must check all three buttons.
Turn the temperature dependency flag on using the command TBFT, SET,,,,,TDEP,1.
2.
3.
Alternatively, you can solve for both shear and bulk data at the same time.
1.
Turn the temperature dependency flag on using the command TBFT, SET,,,,,TDEP,1.
2.
280
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
9.4.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine the Coefficients of Viscoelastic Material Model
9.4.1.5.3. Batch
Solution option command is:
TBFT,SET,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = casename
Option3 = not applicable
Option4 = comp
Option5 = pshea (for Shear only) or pbulk (for bulk only)
The SOLVE option allows you to specify procedure types, tolerances, and number of iterations.
TBFT,SOLVE,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4, ..., Option7
Option2 = visco function name (See Table 9.7,Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations.)
Option3 = not applicable
Option4 = curve fitting procedure: 0 = unnormalized least squares, 1 = normalized least squares (default)
Option5 = maximum number of iterations
Option6 = tolerance of residual changes
Option7 = tolerance of coefficient changes
Other solving parameters are available. See the TBFT command for details.
9.4.1.5.4. GUI
The GUI provides access for you to choose your error norm, solution control parameters, and solver options.
Once you complete these specifications and SOLVE, you can go back and modify your parameters as necessary
to obtain a good curve fit.
9.4.1.6.1. Batch
You enter the plotting parameters from the command line as follows:
TBFT,PLOT,ID,ExpIndex,CASE,Option3
Option3 = casename
9.4.1.6.2. GUI
The Graph button provides direct means to plot the data.
281
Ai =
i2
K t =0
9.4.1.7.1. Batch
TBFT,FSET,ID,Option2,Option3
Option2 = case
Option3 = casename
9.4.1.7.2. GUI
Click the Write to Database button and the fitted coefficients are automatically written to the ANSYS material
database according Prony data table. Please note that the coefficients you see in the curve fitting module are
different from those in the TB tables. The values remain the same, but the values are different. The values
282
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
9.4.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine the Coefficients of Viscoelastic Material Model
shown in ANSYS are the square of the values derived during curve fitting. They are also normalized to make
at time 0 = 1.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
283
284
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Build or import the model. There are no special considerations for building or importing the model for
a gasket joint analysis.You perform this step as you would in any typical ANSYS analysis. See Section 1.1:
Building the Model in the Basic Analysis Guide. For further details on building the model, see the Modeling
and Meshing Guide.
2.
Define element type. To properly simulate gasket joints, you must define structural element types and
corresponding interface element types. See Section 10.3:ANSYS Family of Interface Elements in this chapter
for more details on this topic, and in particular, see Section 10.3.1: Element Selection for a table of corresponding structural and interface elements.
3.
Define material. Use TB,GASKET to define the gasket joint material.You can use TB,GASKET to define
four types of data input: general parameters, transverse shear stiffness, compression (loading), and tension
(unloading).You specify the type using TBOPT.You then input the sets of data using the TBDATA and
TBPT commands, as applicable.You can also plot most of the gasket data types using the TBPLOT
command. See Section 10.4: Material Definition in this chapter for more details on this topic.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
285
Mesh the model. Use the AMESH or VMESH commands to mesh the structural element types, and use
the IMESH command to mesh the gasket layer. Special restrictions apply to the IMESH command in
terms of matching the source and target. Also, the order in which you execute these commands is critical.
You can also mesh interface layers using the VDRAG command, and can generate interface elements
directly using the EGEN command. Each of these commands involve special considerations for interface
elements. See Section 10.5: Meshing Interface Elements in this chapter for more details on this topic.
5.
Solve. There are special solving considerations when you perform a gasket joint analysis.These are
primarily concerned with the gasket element stiffness loss, and the gasket element's use with contact
elements. See Section 10.6: Solution Procedure and Result Output in this chapter for more details on this
topic.
6.
Review Results. You can print or plot any of four gasket output items: stresses (also pressure), total
closure, total inelastic closure, and thermal closure, using the PRESOL, PRNSOL, PLESOL, PLNSOL, or
ESOL commands.You can also use these items with the *GET command in POST1. See Section 10.7: Reviewing the Results in this chapter for more details on this topic.
z
y
O
Z
Midplane
X
286
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
10.3.2. Applications
The 2-D elements, INTER192 and INTER193, use a KEYOPT to define various stress state options.
Proper element type is chosen based on the stress states of interest and structural element types used.
Element selection is done by the element type command, ET, for example,
ET,1,195
10.3.2. Applications
In general, linear and quadratic elements are chosen for the following reasons:
Fewer nodes produce a smaller model that runs faster with less computer resources.
Quadratic elements are necessary if stress gradients are present in surrounding bodies.
If elements are to follow a curved boundary closely, quadratic elements are ideal because their edges are
arcs.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
287
With a free mesh (tetrahedral elements) the mid-node (quadratic) is required for an accurate solution.
When a surrounding structure can be considered as a 2-D structure, for example, plane stress / strain / axisymmetric, 2-D elements are the ideal choice. A good example of the use of 2-D element INTER192 or INTER193 is
the gasket between the "flanged" ends of pipe line. In this case the gasket properties do not vary significantly
with geometric location.
For a 3-D structure such as an internal combustion engine, 3-D element INTER194 or INTER195 is a good choice
for simulating the gasket between the cylinder head and block. In this case there is no "nice" geometry because
the gasket must fill in between two complicated surfaces, in between cylinders, and around other holes and
passages. Also the gasket properties can vary in different zones. For example in a cylinder head, there is usually
a much stiffer zone immediately around the cylinder to contain combustion pressure (called the "fire ring").The
remainder of the gasket is much softer.
288
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
You input the general parameters using the TBDATA command, then input the compression and unloading
data using the TBPT command.
Presented in the following sections are examples of inputs for the various types of gasket data.
Refer to Gasket Materials in the Elements Reference for further details on these parameters.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
289
where: NPTS is the number of unloading points; xi is the closure where unloading started, and yi is unloading
slope.
The following input listing is an example showing the linear unloading behavior of a gasket joint material with
3 unloading points
TB,GASKET,1, ,3,LUNL
! define linear unloading data
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.25100E+12
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, 0.25500E+12
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, 0.10600E+13
A sample plot representing linear unloading curves is shown in Figure 10.3,Gasket Material Input: Linear Unloading
Curves.
290
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
where: xi, yi are pairs of closure and pressure values. Several unloading curves can be defined.
An example showing the nonlinear unloading behavior of a gasket joint material with 3 unloading points is as
follows:
TB,GASKET,1, ,5,NUNL
! define first nonlinear unloading data
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.30000E+09
TBPT,, 0.66900E-04, 0.24750E+08
TBPT,, 0.63100E-04, 0.82500E+07
TBPT,, 0.54100E-04, 0.15000E+07
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00
TB,GASKET,1, ,5,NUNL
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, 0.58500E+09
TBPT,, 0.26400E-03, 0.22350E+08
TBPT,, 0.26100E-03, 0.90000E+07
TBPT,, 0.25600E-03, 0.15000E+07
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00
TB,GASKET,1, ,5,NUNL
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, 0.89550E+09
TBPT,, 0.47800E-03, 0.33900E+08
TBPT,, 0.47500E-03, 0.13500E+08
TBPT,, 0.46800E-03, 0.15000E+07
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00
A sample plot representing nonlinear unloading curves is shown in Figure 10.4,Gasket Material Input: Nonlinear
Unloading Curves.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
291
ANSYS will automatically interpolate the temperature data to the material points using linear interpolation.
When the temperature is out of the specified range, the closest temperature point is used.
The following is an example input listing defining a compressive pressure vs. closure behavior of a gasket joint
material with 5 temperature points and up to 10 data points for each temperature point, and 3 nonlinear unloading
curves with each curve having 5 temperatures and 5 data points.
TB,GASKET,1, 5,10,COMP
! define compression data with 5 temperatures
TBTEMP,
100.000
TBPT,, 0.20000E-04, 0.54000E+08
TBPT,, 0.40000E-04, 0.15150E+09
TBPT,, 0.60000E-04, 0.24900E+09
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.30000E+09
TBPT,, 0.12000E-03, 0.37200E+09
TBPT,, 0.19000E-03, 0.47400E+09
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, 0.58500E+09
TBPT,, 0.35800E-03, 0.67350E+09
TBPT,, 0.43200E-03, 0.78000E+09
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, 0.89550E+09
TBTEMP,
200.000
TBPT,, 0.20000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.40000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.60000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.12000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.19000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.35800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.43200E-03,
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
TBTEMP,
292
0.18000E+08
0.50500E+08
0.83000E+08
0.10000E+09
0.12400E+09
0.15800E+09
0.19500E+09
0.22450E+09
0.26000E+09
0.29850E+09
300.000
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
10.4.3.Temperature Dependencies
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
TBPT,,
0.20000E-04,
0.40000E-04,
0.60000E-04,
0.78000E-04,
0.12000E-03,
0.19000E-03,
0.28600E-03,
0.35800E-03,
0.43200E-03,
0.50500E-03,
0.90000E+07
0.25250E+08
0.41500E+08
0.50000E+08
0.62000E+08
0.79000E+08
0.97500E+08
0.11225E+09
0.13000E+09
0.14925E+09
TBTEMP,
400.000
TBPT,, 0.20000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.40000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.60000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.12000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.19000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.35800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.43200E-03,
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
0.36000E+07
0.10100E+08
0.16600E+08
0.20000E+08
0.24800E+08
0.31600E+08
0.39000E+08
0.44900E+08
0.52000E+08
0.59700E+08
TBTEMP,
500.000
TBPT,, 0.20000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.40000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.60000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.12000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.19000E-03,
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.35800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.43200E-03,
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
0.18000E+07
0.50500E+07
0.83000E+07
0.10000E+08
0.12400E+08
0.15800E+08
0.19500E+08
0.22450E+08
0.26000E+08
0.29850E+08
0.10000E+09
0.82500E+07
0.27500E+07
0.50000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
300.000
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.66900E-04,
TBPT,, 0.63100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.54100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.50000E+08
0.41250E+07
0.13750E+07
0.25000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
400.000
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.66900E-04,
TBPT,, 0.63100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.54100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.20000E+08
0.16500E+07
0.55000E+06
0.10000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
500.000
TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
TBPT,, 0.66900E-04,
TBPT,, 0.63100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.54100E-04,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.10000E+08
0.82500E+06
0.27500E+06
0.50000E+05
0.00000E+00
TB,GASKET,1, 5,5,NUNL
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
293
0.58500E+09
0.22350E+08
0.90000E+07
0.15000E+07
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
200.000
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26400E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26100E-03,
TBPT,, 0.25600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.19500E+09
0.74500E+07
0.30000E+07
0.50000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
300.000
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26400E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26100E-03,
TBPT,, 0.25600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.97500E+08
0.37250E+07
0.15000E+07
0.25000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
400.000
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26400E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26100E-03,
TBPT,, 0.25600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.39000E+08
0.14900E+07
0.60000E+06
0.10000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
500.000
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26400E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26100E-03,
TBPT,, 0.25600E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.19500E+08
0.74500E+06
0.30000E+06
0.50000E+05
0.00000E+00
294
TBTEMP,
200.000
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.46800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.29850E+09
0.11300E+08
0.45000E+07
0.50000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
300.000
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.46800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.14925E+09
0.56500E+07
0.22500E+07
0.25000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
400.000
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.46800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.59700E+08
0.22600E+07
0.90000E+06
0.10000E+06
0.00000E+00
TBTEMP,
500.000
TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.47500E-03,
TBPT,, 0.46800E-03,
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.29850E+08
0.11300E+07
0.45000E+06
0.50000E+05
0.00000E+00
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
T2
T1
Compression curve
Unloading curve
Compression curve
Unloading curve
For meshing gasket layers as an area or volume, use the IMESH command.
For meshing gasket layers by dragging an area mesh along a path, use the VDRAG command.
For generating interface elements directly from a pattern, use the EGEN command.
There are special requirements for meshing interface elements. See Section 7.5.6: Generating an Interface Mesh
for Gasket Simulations in the Modeling and Meshing Guide for further details on this type of meshing.
The following example input listing shows the use of the IMESH command.
/batch,list
/title, Test to demonstrate the use of IMESH command
/com, ************************************************************
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
295
*
*
* This is a simple test to demonstrate the use of IMESH
*
* command to generate gasket elements. The model consists *
* of two blocks with gasket elements (INTER194) defined
*
* between them.
*
*
*
************************************************************
/prep7
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Element Types
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
et,1,187
! Solid tetrahedral element
et,2,194
! Interface layer element
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Parameters
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
EH=1.0
IH=0.1
DX=0
DY=0
DZ=IH
Z1=EH
Z2=Z1+IH
Z3=Z2+EH
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Generate Keypoints
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
k,1,0,0
k,2,1,0
k,3,1,1
k,4,0,1
k,5,0,0,z1
k,6,1,0,z1
k,7,1,1,z1
k,8,0,1,z1
k,9,0,0,z2
k,10,1,0,z2
k,11,1,1,z2
k,12,0,1,z2
k,13,0,0,z3
k,14,1,0,z3
k,15,1,1,z3
k,16,0,1,z3
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Generate First Volume
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
v,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Generate Second Volume
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
v,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Generate Middle Volume
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
v,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Element Size
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
esize,,4
!
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Mesh First Volume with Element Type 1
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
type,1
296
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Figure 10.6,Gasket Finite Element Model Geometry shows the geometry of the finite element model, a thin interface
layer between two block volumes. Figure 10.7,Whole Model Mesh with Brick Element shows the mesh with solid
brick element, SOLID185, in top and bottom of block volumes, and Figure 10.8,Interface Layer Mesh shows the
mesh of interface element, INTER195, in the interface layer between the two blocks. Figure 10.9,Whole Model
Tetrahedral Mesh shows the mesh with solid tetrahedral element, SOLID187, in top and bottom of block volumes,
and Figure 10.10,Interface Layer Mesh with Degenerated Wedge Elements shows the mesh of interface element
(degenerated wedge), INTER194, in the interface layer between the two blocks.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
297
298
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
By default a zero stress cap has been enforced on the gasket. When the element goes into tension, it will
lose its stiffness and may cause numerical instability.
It is always a good practice to place the lower and upper limit on the time step size using the DELTIM or
NSUBST commands, and to start with a small time step, then subsequently ramp it up.This ensures that
all of the modes and behaviors of interest will be accurately included and that the problem is solved effectively.
Gasket elements must be configured to support transverse shear. Even if you do so, errors can result, especially for contact and other nonlinear applications.You should not use gasket elements with contact
elements unless you configure the elements accordingly, and ascertain the mesh compatibility of the
gasket layer and its mating components. If you must use contact elements with gaskets elements, setting
nodal detection normal to target is highly recommended (see Section 3.8.6: Selecting Location of Contact
Detection).
Like any other type of nonlinear analysis, the ANSYS program performs a series of linear approximations with
corrections. A convergence failure can indicate a physical instability in the structure, or it can merely be the result
of some numerical problem in the finite element model.The program printout gives you continuous feedback
on the progress of these approximations and corrections. (The printout either appears directly on your screen,
is captured on Jobname.OUT, or is written to some other file [/OUTPUT].) You can examine some of this same
information in POST1, using the PRITER command, or in POST26, using the SOLU and PRVAR commands.You
should make sure that you understand the iteration history of your analysis before you accept the results. In
particular, do not dismiss any program error or warning statements without fully understanding their meaning.
A typical output listing with gasket nonlinearity only is shown in Section 10.6.1: Typical Gasket Solution Output
Listing. When other types of nonlinearity such as contact or materials are included, additional information will
be printed out.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
299
. . . . .
. UX
UY
. . . . .
INCLUDED.
. . . . .
O P T I O N S
. . .
UZ
. . .
. . .
. . .
. .3-D
. .STATIC (STEADY-STATE)
. .YES
. .PROGRAM CHOSEN
CP=
0.000
TIME= 00:00:00
CP=
0.000
S T E P
TIME= 00:00:00
No .emat or .erot
O P T I O N S
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
. 1.0000
.
ON
.
200
. 20000
.
20
.
15
.
NO
.YES (EXIT)
.USE DEFAULTS
.YES, FOR ELEMENTS WITH
ACTIVE MAT. NONLINEARITIES
PRINT OUTPUT CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . .NO PRINTOUT
DATABASE OUTPUT CONTROLS
ITEM
FREQUENCY
COMPONENT
ALL
ALL
SVAR
ALL
Range of element maximum matrix coefficients in global coordinates
Maximum= 4.326388889E+11 at element 0.
Minimum= 388758681 at element 0.
*** ELEMENT MATRIX FORMULATION TIMES
TYPE NUMBER
ENAME
TOTAL CP AVE CP
1
2
2 SOLID185
0.000
0.000000
1 INTER195
0.000
0.000000
Time at end of element matrix formulation CP= 0.
ALL CURRENT ANSYS DATA WRITTEN TO FILE NAME=
FOR POSSIBLE RESUME FROM THIS POINT
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.4200E+07 CRITERION= 0.2143E+05
SPARSE MATRIX DIRECT SOLVER.
Number of equations =
24,
Memory available (MB) =
0.0
DISP CONVERGENCE VALUE
EQUIL ITER
1 COMPLETED.
Maximum wavefront =
, Memory required (MB)
0
=
0.0
300
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
TYPE
NUMBER
1
2
ENAME
2
1
TOTAL CP
SOLID185
INTER195
0.000
0.000
2
1
SOLID185
INTER195
0.000
0.000
AVE CP
0.000000
0.000000
AVE CP
0.000000
0.000000
301
To review results in POST1, the database must contain the same model for which the solution was calculated.
2.
Verify from your output file (Jobname.OUT) whether or not the analysis converged at all load steps.
If not, you probably won't want to postprocess the results, other than to determine why convergence
failed.
Enter POST1. If your model is not currently in the database, issue RESUME.
Command(s): /POST1
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc
3.
Read in results for the desired load step and substep, which can be identified by load step and substep
numbers or by time.
Command(s): SET
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> load step
4.
Display the results using any of the following options. Note that gasket results, such as pressure and
closure, are always displayed and listed in the local coordinate system.
Option: Display Deformed Shape
Command(s): PLDISP
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape
Option: Contour Displays
Command(s): PLNSOL or PLESOL
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu or
Element Solu
Use these options to display contours of stresses, strains, or any other applicable item. When displaying
the gasket pressure distribution, if other structural mating components are not included, ANSYS will plot
the geometry of those components in gray.To have a better visualization of a gasket pressure plot, it is
better for you to select gasket elements only.
302
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
303
304
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Generate Front and Back SOLID185 Element
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
et,1,185,,1
mat,1
e,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
e,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Generate Middle INTER195 Element
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
et,2,195,,
type,2
mat,2
e,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Define Boundary Condition
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++
nsel,s,loc,z
d,all,uz
nsel,all
nsel,s,loc,x
d,all,ux
nsel,all
nsel,s,loc,y
d,all,uy
nsel,all
finish
/solu
!*+++++++++++++++++++
!* Apply Displacement
!*+++++++++++++++++++
nsel,s,loc,z,elb*2+elg
d,all,uz,dis1
nsel,all
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Solve First Load Step, Compress the Elements
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
nsubst,n1,n2,n3
outres,all,all
outres,svar,all
solve
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Solve Second Load Step, Open the Elements
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
nsubst,n1,n2,n3
outres,all,all
outres,svar,all
nsel,s,loc,z,elb*2+elg
d,all,uz,dis2
nall
solve
finish
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Postprocess the Results
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++
/post1
set,last
pres,s
pres,epto
pres,epel
prns,epel
finish
!*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
!* Post26, Print and Plot Gasket Element Results
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
305
306
3 S
X
press
-139488.
-278977.
-418465.
-557953.
-697442.
-836930.
-976418.
-0.111591E+07
-0.125539E+07
-0.139488E+07
-0.153437E+07
-0.278389E+07
-0.557968E+07
-0.989280E+07
-0.152775E+08
-0.208613E+08
-0.250737E+08
-0.277640E+08
-0.310936E+08
-0.357955E+08
-0.227277E+08
-0.965988E+07
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04
3 EPELX
delta
-0.398672E-04
-0.797343E-04
-0.119601E-03
-0.159469E-03
-0.199336E-03
-0.239203E-03
-0.279070E-03
-0.318937E-03
-0.358804E-03
-0.398672E-03
-0.438539E-03
-0.477349E-03
-0.514686E-03
-0.550578E-03
-0.585450E-03
-0.620132E-03
-0.656120E-03
-0.693558E-03
-0.730387E-03
-0.765909E-03
-0.738405E-03
-0.710900E-03
-0.680150E-03
-0.640200E-03
-0.600250E-03
-0.560300E-03
-0.520350E-03
-0.480400E-03
-0.440450E-03
-0.400500E-03
-0.360550E-03
-0.320600E-03
-0.280650E-03
-0.240700E-03
-0.200750E-03
-0.160800E-03
-0.120850E-03
-0.809000E-04
-0.409500E-04
-0.100000E-05
4 ADD
press
139488.
278977.
418465.
557953.
697442.
836930.
976418.
0.111591E+07
0.125539E+07
0.139488E+07
0.153437E+07
0.278389E+07
0.557968E+07
0.989280E+07
0.152775E+08
0.208613E+08
0.250737E+08
0.277640E+08
0.310936E+08
0.357955E+08
0.227277E+08
0.965988E+07
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04
5 ADD
delta
0.398672E-04
0.797343E-04
0.119601E-03
0.159469E-03
0.199336E-03
0.239203E-03
0.279070E-03
0.318937E-03
0.358804E-03
0.398672E-03
0.438539E-03
0.477349E-03
0.514686E-03
0.550578E-03
0.585450E-03
0.620132E-03
0.656120E-03
0.693558E-03
0.730387E-03
0.765909E-03
0.738405E-03
0.710900E-03
0.680150E-03
0.640200E-03
0.600250E-03
0.560300E-03
0.520350E-03
0.480400E-03
0.440450E-03
0.400500E-03
0.360550E-03
0.320600E-03
0.280650E-03
0.240700E-03
0.200750E-03
0.160800E-03
0.120850E-03
0.809000E-04
0.409500E-04
0.100000E-05
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Contact elements with a bonded contact option and a cohesive zone material model
Build or import the model. There are no special considerations for building or importing the model for
an interface delamination analysis.You perform this step as you would in any typical ANSYS analysis.
See Section 1.1: Building the Model in the Basic Analysis Guide. For further details on building the model,
see the Modeling and Meshing Guide.
2.
Define element type. To properly simulate the cohesive zone, you must define structural element types
and corresponding interface element types. See Section 11.1.2.2: Element Selection in this chapter for
more details on this topic.
3.
Define material. Use TB,CZM with TBOPT = EXPO to define the cohesive zone material that characterizes
the separation behavior at the interface.You then input the sets of data using the TBDATA commands,
as applicable.
4.
Mesh the model. Use the AMESH or VMESH commands to mesh the structural elements, and use the
CZMESH command to mesh the cohesive zone element interface along the layers. Special restrictions
apply to the CZMESH command in terms of matching the source and target. Also, the order in which
you execute these commands is critical.You can only use CZMESH after the underlying solid model has
been meshed.You can also generate interface elements directly using the EGEN command. Each of
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
307
Solve. There are special solving consideration when you perform an interface delamination analysis.
These are primarily concerned with the interface element stiffness loss or softening. Care should be taken
to avoid the numerical instability that may be caused by the delamination and failure of the interface.
6.
Review Results. You can print or plot your cohesive zone output items using the PRESOL, PRNSOL,
PLESOL, PLNSOL, or ESOL commands. See Reviewing the Results in this chapter for more details on this
topic.
The 2-D elements, INTER202 and INTER203, use a KEYOPT to define various stress state options.
Proper element type is chosen based on the stress states of interest and structural element types used.
Element selection is done by the element type command, ET, for example,
ET,1,205
308
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
2t
2
Tt = 2emax n t (1 + n )e n e t
t
for shear traction at the interface, where:
T=
( )
The material constants max, n , and t are input as C1, C2, and C3.The input format is
TB,CZM,,,,
TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3
This CZM material option must be used with interface elements INTER202, INTER203, INTER204, and INTER205.
Use the CZMESH command to generate the interface.You must either define the model into two components or groups of elements (between which the cohesive zone interface elements will reside), or
specify a coordinate value for the line or plane that will divide the model.
Use the E command to directly generate interface elements from a set of nodes.
For generating interface elements directly from a pattern, use the EGEN command.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
309
When the element breaks apart under external loading, it will lose its stiffness and may cause numerical
instability.
It is always a good practice to place the lower and upper limit on the time step size using the DELTIM or
NSUBST commands, and to start with a small time step, then subsequently ramp it up.This ensures that
all of the modes and behaviors of interest will be accurately included and that the problem is solved effectively.
When interface elements are under tension, the normal stiffness is exponentially related to the separation.
That is, the greater the separation, the lower the normal stiffness of the elements.
When interface elements are under compression, you can align contact elements with the interface elements to obtain better penetration control.
A convergence failure can indicate a physical instability in the structure, or it can merely be the result of some
numerical problem in the finite element model.
To review results in POST1, the database must contain the same model for which the solution was calculated.
310
Verify from your output file (Jobname.OUT) whether or not the analysis converged at all load steps.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
2.
If not, you probably won't want to postprocess the results, other than to determine why convergence
failed.
Enter POST1. If your model is not currently in the database, issue RESUME.
Command(s): /POST1
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc
3.
Read in results for the desired load step and substep, which can be identified by load step and substep
numbers or by time.
Command(s): SET
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> load step
4.
Display the results using any of the following options. Note that cohesive zone element results, such as
tension and separation, are always displayed and listed in the local coordinate system.
Option: Display Deformed Shape
Command(s): PLDISP
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape
Option: Contour Displays
Command(s): PLNSOL or PLESOL
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu or
Element Solu
Use these options to display contours of stresses, strains, or any other applicable item. When displaying
the interface tension distribution, if other structural mating components are not included, ANSYS will
plot the geometry of those components in gray.To have a better visualization of an interface tension
plot, it is better for you to select the interface elements only.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
311
Node-to-surface (CONTA175)
Line-to-line (CONTA176)
The contact elements must use bonded contact (KEYOPT(12) = 4, 5 or 6) with the pure penalty method or augmented Lagrangian method (KEYOPT(2) = 0 or 1). Debonding is activated by associating a cohesive zone material model (input with TB,CZM) with the contact elements.
312
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Symbol
max
C3
C4
max
C5
C6
unc
uct
Meaning
maximum normal contact stress
contact gap at the completion of debonding
maximum equivalent tangential contact stress
tangential slip at the completion of debonding
artificial damping coefficient
flag for tangential slip under compressive normal
contact stress
To model bilinear material behavior with tractions and critical fracture energies, use TB,CZM with TBOPT = CBDE.
You also input the following material constants with the TBDATA command:
Constant
C1
C2
Symbol
max
Gcn
Meaning
maximum normal contact stress
critical fracture energy for normal separation
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
313
Symbol
max
Gct
Meaning
maximum equivalent tangential contact stress
critical fracture energy for tangential slip
artificial damping coefficient
flag for tangential slip under compressive normal
contact stress
The following is an example of how to define a cohesive zone material with the TB and TBDATA commands:
TB,CZM,,,,CBDD
! bilinear behavior with tractions and separation distances
TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3,C4,C5,C6
For more information on defining a cohesive zone material in a contact analysis, see Section 2.5.18.2: Cohesive
Zone Materials for Contact Elements in the Elements Reference.
Symbol
P
t
y and z
un
ut
uy and uz
Meaning
normal contact stress
tangential constant stress
components (tangential constant stress)
contact gap
tangential slip
components (tangential slip)
Additionally, debonding specific output quantities are also available.These are output as NMISC data:
Output Quantities
DTSTART
DPARAM
DENERI and DENERII
314
Symbol
(no symbol)
dn, dt, or dm
Gn and Gt
Meaning
debonding time history
debonding parameter
fracture energies
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
315
Opening mode
(K I )
Shearing mode
(KII )
Tearing mode
(KIII )
Stress-intensity factor
Energy-release rate
J-Integral
Stress intensity factors and energy release rates are limited to linear elastic fracture mechanics.The J-Integral is
applicable to both linear elastic and nonlinear elastic-plastic materials.
The following additional topics are available concerning fracture mechanics parameters:
12.1.2.1.The Stress-Intensity Factor
12.1.2.2. J-Integral
12.1.2.3. J-Integral as a Stress-Intensity Factor
ij =
fij ()
gij ( )
where K is the stress-intensity factor, r and are coordinates of a polar coordinate system (as shown in Figure 12.2,
Schematic of a Crack Tip).These equations apply to any of the three fracture modes.
316
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Crack
3
cos 1 sin sin
2r
2
2
2
x =
KI
y =
KI
xy =
3
cos sin cos
2r
2
2
2
KI
The stress-intensity factor and the energy-release rate are related by:
G=
K2
E
E =
1 2 for plane strain, and E = E for plane stress. (E is the mawhere G denotes the energy-release rate,
terial Youngs modulus, and is the Poissons ratio.)
12.1.2.2. J-Integral
J-Integral is one of the most widely accepted parameters for elastic-plastic fracture mechanics.The J-Integral is
defined as follows [2]:
u j
J = Lim ( w + T ) li ij
nid
xl
> 0 o
where W is the strain energy density, T is the kinematic energy density, represents the stresses, u is the displacement vector, and is the contour over which the integration is carried out.
For a crack in a linear elastic material, the J-Integral represents the energy-release rate. Also, the amplitudes of
the crack tip stress and deformation fields are characterized by the J-Integral for a crack in a nonlinear elastic
material.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
317
=
+
o o
o
where 0 is the reference stress (the yield stress of the material), and 0 = 0/E, is a dimensionless constant,
and n is the hardening component. They showed that, at a distance very close to the crack tip and well within
the plastic zone, the crack tip stress and strain ahead of crack tip can be expressed as:
1
J n
ij = f ( )
r
and
n
J n +1
ij = g( )
r
1/
318
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
y,v
z,w
crack face
crack front
x,u
crack tip
crack face
(b)
(a)
(a) 2-D models and (b) 3-D models
The following additional topics related to solving fracture problems are available :
12.2.1. Modeling the Crack Tip Region
12.2.2. Calculating Fracture Parameters
, where r is the distance from the crack tip.The stresses and strains are
r
.To produce this singularity in stresses and strains, the crack tip mesh
The elements around the crack tip (or crack front) should be quadratic, with the midside nodes placed at
the quarter points. (Such elements are called singular elements.)
Figure 12.4,Singular Element Examples shows examples of singular elements for 2-D and 3-D fracture models.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
319
PLANE183
(a)
N
U
M
SOLID186
O,P,W
A,B
I
R
T
(b)
K,L,S
320
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Y
Z X
Take advantage of symmetry where possible. In many cases, you need to model only one half of the crack region,
with symmetry or antisymmetry boundary conditions, as shown below.
Half model
Half model
Symmetry boundary
conditions
Full model
Anti-symmetry
boundary conditions
For reasonable results, the first row of elements around the crack tip should have a radius of approximately a /
8 or smaller, where a is the crack length. In the circumferential direction, roughly one element every 30 or 40
is recommended.
The crack tip elements should not be distorted and should take the shape of isosceles triangles.
321
J-Integral
The J-Integral calculation is performed at the solution level and results are stored to ANSYS result file (.rst) for
postprocessing.To perform a J-Integral calculation, you need to use the CINT command.The stress-intensity
factors are calculated at postprocessing (POST1) with the KCAL command. For more information, see Numerical
Evaluation of Fracture Mechanics Parameters.
where ne is the number of elements to be integrated, wiw is the weight function, and Aie is the area of the element
represented by ie.
322
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
PLANE182
PLANE183
SOLID185
SOLID186
SOLID187
Linear elasticity
Plasticity
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
323
Define the crack tip node component and the crack plane normal.
This approach applies for both 2-D crack geometry and 3-D flat crack surfaces. It offers a simple way to
define a 3-D J-Integral calculation, as you need only define the crack tip (front) node component and the
normal of the crack plane. Use this method when the crack plane is flat.
Define the crack extension node component and crack extension direction.
This approach applies for 3-D curve crack planes, where a unique normal may not exist. However, you
must define the crack extension node component and the crack extension direction at each crack tip
node location. Use this method when the crack plane is not flat, or when a set of nodes form the crack
tip, as in the case of a collapsed crack tip mesh.
12.3.1.4.2.1. Define the Crack Tip Node Component and Crack Plane Normal
For 2-D crack geometry, define a crack tip node component (usually a node located at the crack tip).You can
also define a group of nodes around the crack tip, including the node at the crack tip. ANSYS uses this group of
nodes as the starting nodes to form the necessary information for the contour integration automatically.
For 3-D flat crack geometry, you must define a crack tip node component that includes all of the nodes along
the crack front. At each node location, however, only one node can exist. All nodes in the crack tip node component
must be connectable, and they must form a line based on the element connectivity associated with it.This line
is the crack front. ANSYS uses it to automatically determine the elements for the contour integration.The procedure is similar to 2-D crack geometry, and is done through all the nodes along the crack front.
The command syntax is:
CINT,CTNC,CMNAME
After the crack tip node component is defined, use the CINT command's NORMAL option to define the normal
of the crack plane. ANSYS automatically converts it into the crack extension vector q, based on the element information.The crack extension vector is taken along the perpendicular direction to the plane formed by the
crack plane normal and the tangent direction of the crack tip node, and is normalized to a unit vector.
The command syntax is:
CINT,NORMAL,par1,par2
where par1 is the coordinate system number and par2 is the axis of coordinate system par1.
324
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Example 2
! select nodes located along the crack front and define it as crack front/tip node component
LSEL,,,,
NSLL
CM,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM,NODE
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,CTNC, CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM,
12.3.1.4.2.2. Define the Crack Extension Node Component and Crack Extension Direction
Use this method when the crack plane is not flat, or when a set of nodes form the crack tip, as in the case of a
collapsed crack tip mesh:
1.
Define a node component consisting of one or more nodes forming the crack tip. The node component can have one or more nodes.
Example: CINT,CENCOMP,CMNAME
2.
Identify the crack tip node separately if the node component has more than one node. If a crack
tip node is not identified, then the first node of the node component is taken to be the first node.
Example: CINT,CENCOMP,CMNAME,node1
3.
Repeat this method for all node locations along the crack front.
Example 1
! local coordinate systems
local,11,0,,,,
local,12,0,,,,
local,n,0,,,,
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctip1
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctip1
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctip1
CM,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM1
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctip2
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctip2
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
325
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctipn
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctipn
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctipn
CM,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CMn
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,CENC, CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM1,,11,2
CINT,CENC, CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM2,,11,2
CINT,CENC, CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM2,,n,2
Example 2
! Crack extension node component and
! crack extension direction specification using vectors
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctip1
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctip1
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctip1
CM,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM1
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctip2
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctip2
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctip2
CM,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM2
NSEL,S,LOC,X,Xctipn
NSEL,R,LOC,Y,Yctipn
NSEL,R,LOC,Z,Zctipn
CM,CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CMn
CINT,NEW,1
CINT,CENC, CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM1, , , ,Vx1,Vy1,Vz1
CINT,CENC, CRACK_FRONT_NODE_CM2, , , ,Vx2,Vy2,Vz2
326
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
2.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
327
y,v
r
x,u
symmetry (or
anti-symmetry
plane
3
5
2
4
(a)
x,u
(b)
328
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
2.
Set options for the crack tip mesh using the CTMOPT macro.
You can specify whether the analysis involves a surface or through crack, full/half/quarter symmetry,
crack dimensions, and more.
3.
Position the working plane on or slightly off of the surface of the solid model.
Orient the working plane as required for the particular type of crack being modeled.The X-Z plane must
also be the crack plane, with the X direction parallel to the direction of the crack extension and the Y
axis normal to the crack plane.
4.
Issue CTMESH,999 to preview the size, orientation, and position of the crack mesh construction
volumes.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
329
Figure 12.10 Potential Mesh Volume with Crack Length and Orientation Defined
5.
Issue CTMESH.
The crack tip region meshes according to the options previously set via the CTMOPT macro.
330
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
After meshing, displacement and stress fields around the crack tip may look something like this.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
331
Following is the entire input necessary for generating the crack tip model shown in this example:
resume, pump_housing,db
/TITLE,Pump housing crack meshing
/PREP7
VLSCAL,1,,,100,100,100, ,0,1 ! METERS TO CM TO HELP BOOLEANS
ET,1,186
KWPLAN,-1,109,107,110
KWPAVE,56,109,110
WPRO,30
! SET CRACK MESH OPTIONS
CTMOPT,VOLU,1
CTMOPT,CONF,SURF
CTMOPT,LENGTH,0.7874
CTMOPT,DEPTH,0.2756
CTMESH
332
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
The ANSYS database file pump_housing.db is available at one of the following locations:
UNIX version:
.../ansys_inc/v110/ansys/data/models
PC version:
...\Program Files\Ansys Inc\V110\ANSYS\data\models
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
333
Anderson, T. L. Fracture Mechanics -- Fundamentals and Applications. 2nd ed. Boca Raton: CRC, 1994.
2.
Rice, J. R.A Path Independent Integral and the Approximate Analysis of Strain Concentration by Notched
and Cracks. Journal of Applied Mathematics. 35 (1968): 379-386.
3.
Hutchinson, J. W.Singular Behavior at the End of a Tensile Crack in a Hardening Material. Journal of the
Mechanics and Physics of Solids. 16, 1 (1968): 13-31.
334
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Rice, J. R. and G. F. Rosengren.Plane Strain Deformation Near a Crack Tip in a Power Law Hardening
Material. Journal of the Mechanics and Physics of Solids. 16 (1968): 1-12.
5.
Shih, C. F., B. Moran, and T. Nakamura.Energy Release Rate Along a Three-Dimensional Crack Front in
a Thermally Stressed Body. International Journal of Fracture. 30, 2 (1986): 79-102.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
335
336
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
337
338
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
SOLID95 -- This 20-node structural solid element, with KEYOPT(1) = 1, functions similarly to a single layered
SOLID191 including the use of an orientation angle and failure criterion. It allows nonlinear materials and
large deflections.
SHELL63 -- This 4-node shell element can be used for rough,approximate studies of sandwich shell models.
A typical application would be a polymer between two metal plates, where the bending stiffness of the
polymer would be small relative to the bending stiffness of the metal plates.The bending stiffness can
be adjusted by the real constant RMI to represent the bending stiffness due to the metal plates, and distances from the middle surface to extreme fibers (real constants CTOP, CBOT) can be used to obtain output
stress estimates on the outer surfaces of the sandwich shell. It is not used as frequently as SHELL91,
SHELL99, SHELL181, or SHELL281, and is not considered for anything other than sandwich structures in
this section.
SOLID65 -- This 3-D reinforced concrete solid element models an isotropic medium with optional reinforcing
in three different user-defined orientations.
BEAM188 and BEAM189 -- These 3-D finite strain beam elements can have their sections built up with
multiple materials.
By defining constitutive matrices that relate generalized forces and moments to generalized strains and
curvatures (available only for SOLID46 and SHELL99 )
The following topics related to defining the layered configurationare are available:
13.1.2.1. Specifying Individual Layer Properties
13.1.2.2. Defining the Constitutive Matrices
13.1.2.3. Sandwich and Multiple-Layered Structures
13.1.2.4. Node Offset
339
4
3
2
1
For each layer, the following properties are specified in the element real constant table (R, RMORE, RMODIF)
accessed with REAL attributes:
You can also define layered sections via the Section Tool (Prep>Sections>Shell - Add/edit). For each layer, the
following are specified in the section definition via the section commands (SECTYPE, SECDATA) or the Section
Tool accessed with the SECNUM attributes.
Material Properties -- As with any other element, the MP command defines the linear material properties,
and the TB command is used to define the nonlinear material data tables. (Plasticity is available only for
elements SOLID191 and SHELL91).The only difference is that the material attribute number for each layer
of an element is specified in the element's real constant table. For the layered elements, the MAT command
attribute is used only for the DAMP and REFT arguments of the MP command.The linear material properties
for each layer may be either isotropic or orthotropic.Typical fiber-reinforced composites contain orthotropic materials and these properties are most often supplied in the major Poisson's ratio form. Material
property directions are parallel to the layer coordinate system, defined by the element coordinate system
and the layer orientation angle.
Layer Orientation Angle -- Defines the orientation of the layer coordinate system with respect to the element
coordinate system. It is the angle (in degrees) between X-axes of the two systems. By default, the layer
coordinate system is parallel to the element coordinate system. All elements have a default coordinate
system which you can change using the ESYS element attribute (ESYS) .You may also write your own
subroutines to define the element and layer coordinate systems (USERAN and USANLY); for more information, see the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features.
Layer Thickness -- If the layer thickness is constant, you only need to specify TK(I), the thickness at node I.
Otherwise, the thicknesses at the four corner nodes must be input. Dropped layers may be represented
with zero thickness.
Number of integration points per layer -- Allows you to determine in how much detail the program should
compute the results. For very thin layers, when used with many other layers, one point would be appropriate. But for laminates with few layers, more would be needed.The default is three points.This feature
applies only to sections defined via the SECxxxxx section commands.
340
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Note
The ANSYS GUI allows layer real constant input of up to 100 layers. If more layers are needed for
SHELL99 or SOLID46, use the R and RMORE commands.
The terms of the matrices are defined as real constants. Mass effects are incorporated by specifying an average
density (real constants AVDENS) for the element. If the matrix approach is used, detailed results in each layer
cannot be obtained since individual layer information is not input.
Faceplate
Core (at least 1/2
of total thickness)
Faceplate
You can model sandwich structures with SHELL63, SHELL91, SHELL181, or SHELL281.
SHELL63 has one layer but permits sandwich modeling through the use of real constants.You can modify the
effective bending moment of inertia and the distance from the middle surface to the extreme fibers to account
for the weak core.
For SHELL91, the KEYOPT(9) = 1 option specified the sandwich option.The core is assumed to carry all of the
transverse shear, while the faceplates carry none; conversely, the faceplates are assumed to carry all (or almost
all) of the bending load. Only SHELL91 has this sandwich option.
SHELL181 and SHELL281 model the transverse shear deflection using an energy equivalence method that makes
the need for a sandwich option unnecessary.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
341
Tsai-Wu Failure Criterion -- Allows nine failure stresses and three additional coupling coefficients.
The failure strains, stresses, and coupling coefficients may be temperature-dependent. For details about the data
required for each criterion, see the Elements Reference .
Failure criteria are orthotropic, so you must input the failure stress or failure strain values for all directions. (The
exception is that compressive values default to tensile values.)
342
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
FC Command Family
The FC commands are FC, FCDELE, and FCLIST. A typical sequence of commands to specify a failure criterion
using these commands is shown below.
FC,1,TEMP,,
100,
FC,1,S,XTEN, 1500,
FC,1,S,YTEN, 400,
FC,1,S,ZTEN,10000,
FC,1,S,XY , 200,
FC,1,S,YZ ,10000,
FC,1,S,XZ ,10000,
FCLIST,
,100
FCLIST,
,150
FCLIST,
,200
PRNSOL,S,FAIL
200
1200
500
8000
200
8000
8000
! Temperatures
! Maximum stress components
!
!
!
!
List status
List status
List status
Use Failure
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
343
EPLOT -- Displays all selected elements. Using the /ESHAPE,1 command before EPLOT causes shell elements to be displayed as solids with the layer thicknesses obtained from real constants or section definition
(see Figure 13.5,Example of an Element Display.This example uses element SHELL99 with /ESHAPE turned
on). It also causes SOLID46 elements to be displayed with layers.
/PSYMB,LAYR,n followed by EPLOT -- Displays layer number n for all selected layered elements. Use this
method to display and verify each individual layer across the entire model.
/PSYMB,ESYS,1 followed by EPLOT -- Displays the element coordinate system triad for those elements
whose default coordinate system has been changed.
LAYLIST -- Lists the layer stacking sequence from real constants and any two material properties for
SHELL99, SHELL91, SOLID46, and SOLID191 elements.You can specify a range of layer numbers for the
listing.
LIST LAYERS
1 TO
4 IN REAL SET
TOTAL LAYERS =
4 LSYM =
1 LP1 =
344
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
LAYPLOT -- Displays the layer stacking sequence from real constants in the form of a sheared deck of
cards. (See Figure 13.6,Sample LAYPLOT Display for [45/-45/ - 45/45] Sequence.) The layers are crosshatched
and color coded for clarity.The hatch lines indicate the layer angle (real constant THETA) and the color
indicates layer material number (MAT).You can specify a range of layer numbers for the display.
SECPLOT -- Displays the section stacking sequence from sections in the form of a sheared deck of cards.
(See Figure 13.6,Sample LAYPLOT Display for [45/-45/ - 45/45] Sequence.) The sections are crosshatched
and color coded for clarity.The hatch lines indicate the layer angle (THETA) and the color indicates layer
material number (MAT) defined by the SECDATA command.You can specify a range of layer numbers
for the display.
Material #
1
1
Theta
2
45
2
3
-45
4
-45
45
345
346
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
347
You may want to examine a FiberSIM .xml file before use to verify that the geometry data in the .xml file and
in the ANSYS model use the same system of units and the same coordinate system. An effective method for doing
so is to convert each layer to an ANSYS PREP7 input file and then plot it, as follows:
1.
Select the layer of interest and delete the remainder of the file.
2.
Remove the warp and weft angles as well as the <R/> symbols.
3.
Using a spreadsheet program or text editor, convert the nodal and element blocks into ANSYS N and E
commands. (Include columns for the command names and commas.)
4.
5.
ANSYS uses only the CURED_THICKNESS attribute and ignores the others. ANSYS considers the cured thickness
to be the layer thickness when TKFLG = 0 (SECCONTROLS).
Limitations of the FiberSIM XML File
The FiberSIM-ANSYS interface assumes that all layers are built up starting at one side and going through all layers
to the other side. FiberSIM has an option where layers are built up from both sides, ending in the middle; however,
the interface does not support this option.
The FiberSIM-ANSYS interface supports only plies, and not cores.
Create nodes.
2.
3.
4.
Issue section commands (SECTYPE, SECDATA, SECCONTROLS, SECOFFSET, SECREAD, and SLIST) as
needed to apply material properties and thickness to flat layers.
5.
Define elements.
6.
7.
Solve.
348
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
349
2.
For each layer, ANSYS searches the FiberSIM .xml file to find the first triangular facet that includes the
centroid to the tolerances specified via the SECCONTROLS command.
3.
If no facets are found, ANSYS assumes a dropped layer for that element.
4.
If ANSYS finds more than one qualifying facet, it uses only the first one to define the angle of the layer.
5.
If ANSYS finds no facets in any layer, it assumes that an error has occurred and terminates. If you input
a non-zero edge tolerance value (SECCONTROLS,,,,,,,,EDGTOL), the error message includes the distance
to the nearest FiberSIM triangle.
You can monitor the search process by setting the SECCONTROLS command's NEL option.The option generates
debug output for the specified number of elements.
When a layer has darts and the cut ends of the material are brought close together, the layer is not continuous
across those parts.Therefore, ensure that a sufficient number of ANSYS elements are defined in those areas so
that at least one element across the transition does not include that layer.
For large models, the search process can be time-consuming; therefore, for iterative analyses during the solution
phase, ANSYS saves the layer information in the element saved-data file (.ESAV). ANSYS does not save the layer
information during preprocessing and postprocessing, however, so operations such as LAYPLOT and PRESOL,S,X
may require more time to execute than expected.
350
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
A formal fatigue evaluation accounts for each of these factors as it calculates how "used up" a certain component
will become during its anticipated life cycle.
The following fatigue-related topics are available:
14.1. How ANSYS Calculates Fatigue
14.2. Fatigue Terminology
14.3. Evaluating Fatigue
You can postprocess existing stress results to determine the fatigue usage factors for any solid-element
or shell-element model. (You can also manually input stresses for fatigue evaluation of line-element
models.)
You can store stresses at a preselected number of locations for a preselected number of events and
loadings within the event.
You can define stress concentration factors for each location and scale factors for each event.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
351
2.
Establish the size (the number of locations, events, and loadings), define the fatigue material properties,
identify stress locations, and define stress concentration factors.
3.
Store stresses at locations of interest for various events and loadings; assign event repetitions and scale
factors.
4.
5.
The following fatigue-evaluation topics describe each step in detail and provide additional information:
14.3.1. Enter POST1 and Resume Your Database
14.3.2. Establish the Size, Fatigue Material Properties, and Locations
14.3.3. Store Stresses and Assign Event Repetitions and Scale Factors
14.3.4. Activate the Fatigue Calculations
14.3.5. Review the Results
14.3.6. Other Approaches to Range Counting
14.3.7. Sample Input
Enter POST1.
Command(s): /POST1
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc
2.
Read your database file (Jobname.DB) into active memory. (If your intended fatigue evaluation is a
continuation of an ongoing ANSYS session, then Jobname.DB will already be in memory.) A results file
(Jobname.RST) with nodal stress results should also be available; you will read results data into memory
later.
Command(s): RESUME
GUI: Utility Menu> File> Resume from
1.
352
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
The S-N curve, a curve of alternating stress intensity ((Smax - Smin)/2) versus allowable number of
cycles.The ASME S-N curves already account for maximum mean stress effects.You should adjust
your S-N curve to account for mean-stress effects, if necessary. If you do not input an S-N curve, alternating stress intensities will be listed in decreasing order for all possible combinations of stress
conditions, but no usage factors will be calculated.
Command(s): FP
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Property Table> S-N Table
The Sm-T curve, a curve of design stress-intensity value versus temperature.This curve is needed if
you want the program to detect whether or not the nominal stress range has gone plastic.
Command(s): FP
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Property Table> Sm_T Table
Elastic-plastic material parameters M and N (strain hardening exponents).These parameters are required only if you desire simplified elastic-plastic code calculations.These parameters' values can be
obtained from the ASME Code.
Command(s): FP
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Property Table> Elas-plas Par
The following example illustrates the use of the FP command to input material fatigue properties:
! Define the S-N table:
FP,1,10,30,100,300,1000,10000
FP,7,100000,1000000
FP,21,650,390,240,161,109,59
FP,27,37,26
! Define the Sm-T table:
FP,41,100,200,300,400,500,600
FP,47,650,700,750,800
FP,51,20,20,20,18.7,17.4,16.4
FP,57,16.1,15.9.15.5,15.1
! Allowable Cycles, N
!
"
! Alternating Stress! Intensity Range, S, ksi
! Temperature,F
!
"
! "Design Stress-Intensity
! Value", Sm (=2/3*Sy or
! 1/3 *Su), ksi
! Define the elastic-plastic material parameters:
FP,61,1.7,.3
!
M and N
3.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
353
Note
Not all fatigue analyses will require the FL command. Locations are automatically defined for nodes
when FS, FSNODE, or FSSECT are issued (see below). If your model contains sufficient grid detail,
your stresses could be accurate enough that you would not need to apply calculated SCFs. (Supplemental SCFs for surface, size, or corrosion effects might still be required, however.) Where only one
location is being examined, you could omit a title. If explicit definition of locations, SCFs, or titles are
not required, you could forgo the FL command entirely.
Here is an example of some FL commands for a cylinder with a global Y axis, having two wall thicknesses of interest,
where SCFs are to be applied (to the axial linearized stresses) at the outside wall.
FL,1,281,,,,Line 1 at inside
FL,2,285,,1.85,,Line 1 at outside
FL,3,311,,,,Line 2 at inside
FL,4,315,,2.11,,Line 2 at outside
285
SCF = 2.11
Y
311
315
14.3.3. Store Stresses and Assign Event Repetitions and Scale Factors
14.3.3.1. Storing Stresses
In order to perform a fatigue evaluation, the program must know the stresses at different events and loadings
for each location, as well as the number of repetitions of each event.You can store stresses for each combination
of location, event, and loading, using the following options:
Stresses at a cross-section
Caution
The program never assumes that a "zero" stress condition exists. If zero stress is one of the conditions to
be considered, it must be explicitly input for each event in which it may occur.
The following command sequences schematically illustrate how to store stresses. In some situations, you might
prefer to use LCASE instead of SET.
Manually stored stresses:
354
FS
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
14.3.3. Store Stresses and Assign Event Repetitions and Scale Factors
Nodal stresses retrieved from Jobname.RST: SET, FSNODE
Stresses at a cross-section:
PATH, PPATH, SET, FSSECT
(Cross-section calculations also require data from Jobname.RST.)
You can use more than one method of storing stresses in an event. Each of these methods is explained in detail
below.
In this example, only the total stresses (items 1-6) and the temperature (item 7) are input. If the linearized stresses
were also to be input, they would follow the temperatures as items 8 through 13.
Note
In the special case of a beam element having only axial stress, you would input only one stress
component (SX), leaving the rest of the stress fields blank.
Note
You must issue a SET command, and possibly a SHELL command, before executing FSNODE. SET
will read results for a particular load substep from the results file (Jobname.RST) into the database.
SHELL allows you to select results from the top, middle, or bottom surfaces for shell elements (default
is the top surface).
Command(s): FSNODE
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store Stresses> From rst File
Input by means of FSNODE is demonstrated by the following example for an event at one nodal location:
SET,1
FSNODE,123,1,1
SET,2
FSNODE,123,1,2
SET,3
FSNODE,123,1,3
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
355
stress
L.S.2
L.S.3
L.S.1
time
Figure 14.3 Surface Nodes are Identified by PPATH Prior to Executing FSSECT
List the stored stresses per location, per event, per loading, or per stress condition:
Command(s): FSLIST
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store Stresses> List Stresses
356
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
14.3.3. Store Stresses and Assign Event Repetitions and Scale Factors
Display a stress item as a function of loading number for a particular location and event:
Command(s): FSPLOT
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store Stresses> Plot Stresses
Delete a stress condition stored for a particular location, event, and loading:
Command(s): FSDELE
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store Stresses> Dele Stresses
Caution
It can be surprisingly easy to misuse the range-counting feature of the fatigue module.You must take
pains to assemble events carefully if you want your fatigue evaluation to yield accurate usage factors.
Consider the following guidelines when assembling events:
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
357
Understand the internal logic of the ANSYS range-counting algorithm. See the Theory Reference for ANSYS
and ANSYS Workbench for more details on how the ANSYS program performs range counting.
Because it can be difficult to predict the exact load step at which a maximum (or minimum) 3-D stress
state occurs, good practice often requires that you include several clustered loadings in each event, in
order to successfully capture the extreme stress state. (See Figure 14.2,Three Loadings in One Event.)
You will obtain consistently conservative results if you include only one extreme stress condition (either
a local maximum or a local minimum) in any given event. If you group more than one extreme condition
in a single event, you will sometimes generate unconservative results, as illustrated by the following example:
loading 1: Sx = 50.0
loading 2: Sx = -50.1
loading 1: Sx = 50.1
loading 2: Sx = -50.0
500 repetitions
1000 repetitions
50.05 ksi
0.05 ksi
50.00 ksi
50.10 ksi
0.05 ksi
50.05 ksi
50.10 ksi
50.05 ksi
50.05 ksi
50.00 ksi
0.05 ksi
0.05 ksi
358
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
500 cycles of E2 to E3
0 cycles of E1 to E2
500 cycles of E3 to E4
500 cycles of E1 to E4
0 cycles of E1 to E3
0 cycles of E2 to E4
Cumulative fatigue damage in this case would properly be calculated for 1500 repetitions of about 50 ksi range.
Conversely, using separate events for each maximum and each minimum stress condition could sometimes
become too conservative. In such cases, carefully choose those loadings that should be counted together,
and group them into the same events.The following example illustrates how some events can appropriately
contain multiple extreme stress conditions:
It is readily apparent that the worst possible combination of these cycles would yield 500 repetitions having alternating stress intensity of about 25 ksi range.
Proceeding as in the above example, grouping these loadings into two events would produce an accurate count
of 500 repetitions of about 25 ksi range.Treating each loading as a separate event would yield an over-conservative count of 1000 repetitions of about 25 ksi range.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
359
See the Commands Reference for a discussion of the FTSIZE,FP,FL,FS,FSNODE,PPATH,FSSECT,FE, and FTCALC
commands.
360
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
2.
3.
4.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
361
Defining a p-element: The p-method solution procedure can also be activated by defining a p-element. If
you are working outside of the GUI, the definition of a p-element lets the program know that a p-method
solution is to be done; no other commands are necessary to initiate p-method. From within the GUI, you
can also issue the ET command in the "Input Window" to activate the p-method procedure. (Remember,
the ET command must be entered in the "Input Window," since, by default, only h-elements are displayed
in the GUI unless p-method is active.)
Command(s): ET
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete
2.
3.
4.
The above steps are common to most analyses.The Modeling and Meshing Guide explains those steps in detail.
In this section we will explain the techniques that are unique to a p-analysis.
Note
H-elements and p-elements cannot be active at the same time in your model.
362
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Note
Convergence checking for SHELL150 begins at a p-level of 3 instead of a p-level of 2.
Use local p-range control to eliminate regions of little importance from high p-escalation. Use global p-range
control for overall control of the p-level.These range controls are not necessary, but p-escalations to high plevels increase CPU time.Therefore, it is advantageous to have such controls available.
See the Elements Reference for complete descriptions of each of the above element types.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
363
Caution
Element coordinate systems [ESYS] used for orthotropic material directions are not supported by
p-elements. All element coordinate systems are parallel to the global Cartesian coordinate system.
Note
Using direct generation is not recommended when you plan to create a p-mesh since all p-elements
require that midside nodes be included in their geometric definition. In cases where surface curvature
is important, it would not only be tedious, but possibly imprecise to manually define each midside
node. In addition, the EMID command does not place nodes on a curved line. It is much more convenient to let the program generate the midside nodes using solid modeling.
You may not drop any midside nodes from p-elements.
If you use direct generation or import your mesh from an outside source, keep the following guidelines in mind:
The angles between adjacent edges should be between 10 and 170. Element shape checking will warn
that adjacent edges should be between 30 and 150, but it is usually acceptable to have angles in the
range of 10 to 170 for p-elements.
A good rule of thumb is to keep the aspect ratio (ratio of element length to width) less than 20:1.
364
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Note
Adaptive meshing is not valid with a p-method analysis.
Note
Since p-method prefers a coarser mesh, the default element size values for a p-method analysis are
different than those used for h-elements. See the SMRTSIZE and DESIZE commands for details.
For fracture or fatigue assessments, you may still need to specify meshing controls because the mesh must be
fine enough to obtain the desired accuracy near the areas of interest. In certain cases, such as when there are
severe geometric transition regions, you may also need to specify mesh controls to avoid a meshing failure.
You may also want to specify meshing controls for curved geometries, where successful meshes are more difficult
to achieve with the default size settings. Under default conditions, badly shaped elements may be produced
because of the difficulty of filling a curved domain with as few elements as possible. User-defined meshing
controls can make the task less difficult.
Subdivide complex geometries, or build them as separate geometries. As a general rule, if you were to
stand inside a volume, you should be able to see all of its vertices. If this is not possible, you might wish
to consider subdividing the volume into more manageable pieces.
The number of divisions on lines "parallel" and near to each other should be fairly equivalent.The SmartSizing method of meshing [SMRTSIZE] handles this situation well. However, if the DESIZE method of
element sizing is used, you should set local mesh controls to achieve a good mesh in these areas.
For beam-like or shell-like models, use one element through the thickness in the meshed model. SmartSizing will do this automatically. However, if you are using DESIZE for meshing, set the default element
size [MINH] to 1 [DESIZE,,1].
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
365
15.2.3.2. Coupling
You may couple degrees of freedom (DOFs) between nodes on p-elements to control nodal solution behavior.
All coupled nodes are forced to assume the same displacement values in the specified nodal coordinate direction.
The amount of this displacement is unknown until the analysis has been completed.
Command(s): CP
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Coupling/Ceqn> Couple DOFs
The first degree of freedom defined on the coupled set is the "prime" degree of freedom. All other degrees of
freedom in the coupled set are eliminated from the solution matrices as a result of their relationship to the prime
degree of freedom.
Note
For p-elements, only the corner nodes may be defined as prime degrees of freedom if midside nodes
are also part of the same coupled set.
366
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
7
3
CP
2
1
2.
5
CP,n,UY,3,2
Fy
3 11
15
12
6 14
2 10
Fx
16
13
CP,n,UX,3,11
Both corner nodes on the element's edge or face are part of the same coupled set. Only the corner nodes
may be defined as prime degrees of freedom.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
367
7
3
CP,n,UY,3,6,2 or CP,n,UY,2,6,3
CP but NOT
CP,n,UY,6,2,3
2
1
5
Fy
2.
All nodes in the coupled set are midside nodes. In this case, a midside node must be defined as the prime
degree of freedom, but this is only valid as long as there are no corner nodes defined as part of the same
coupled set.
3 12
15
11
6 16
14
2 9
13
Fx
10
CP,n,UX,6,16
Note
If you have coupled faces or edges on a p-element (that is, all edges of the element's face or all nodes
of the element's edge are coupled), the p-level of that edge or face will be held to 2. In addition,
constraint equations (used to represent relatively rigid parts) are not available in a p-method analysis.
Enter SOLUTION.
Command(s): /SOLU
GUI: Main Menu> Solution
2.
Define the analysis options. Choose any of three options to solve the simultaneous equations generated
by a p-method analysis.These solvers are discussed at length in Chapter 3: Solution in the Basic Analysis
Guide.
368
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
We generally recommend that you use the PCG solver for a p-element analysis. For most 3-D solid
models and for very large 2-D models (usually greater than 40,000 DOF), the PCG solver is usually faster
than the JCG and frontal solvers:
The PCG solver is about 5 to 10 times faster than the frontal solver for p-elements.
Computer-time savings will be greater with the PCG solver when p-levels of 4 and higher are active.
In certain cases, such as when your model contains elements with high aspect ratios or material type
discontinuities, a greater number of iterations may be required to achieve convergence for the PCG
solver.You may increase the maximum number of iterations by using the MULT option on the EQSLV
command.This option is only valid when solving with the PCG solver. See the EQSLV command description
in the Commands Reference for more information on this capability.
For more information on the general use of the PCG solver, refer to Chapter 3: Solution in the Basic Analysis Guide.
3.
Apply the loads to the solid model (keypoints, lines, areas, etc.) or to the finite element model (nodes
and elements), except for inertia loads (gravity, rotational velocity, etc.), which are independent of the
model. For a general discussion of solid model loads versus finite element loads, see Chapter 2: Loading
in the Basic Analysis Guide.
Internal Degrees of Freedom and Nodal Coordinate Systems
In order to correctly apply boundary conditions, you need to understand nodal coordinate systems, and
how degrees of freedom (DOFs) which are not attached to a node are handled. DOFs are the allowed
motions or deformations of the elements.Those DOFs which are not attached to a node are referred to
as internal degrees of freedom.
Internal DOFs allow the elements to form a better approximation to the real solution. As the p-level
is increased for each loop, more DOFs are added to the elements. Some of these DOFs act on the
element boundary (edges and interior faces) resulting in deformations that vary from a polynomial
order of 2 to 8. In many cases, the higher the p-level, the more complex the deformation, and the
better the approximation to the real solution.
Nodal coordinate systems orient the degree of freedom directions at each node. Each node has its
own nodal coordinate system, which, by default, is parallel to the global Cartesian system (regardless
of the coordinate system in which the node was defined). Nodes may be rotated into a nodal coordinate system [NROTAT] (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Move/Modify> Rotate Node CS>
To Active CS).The constraints and forces are then applied to the nodes in the nodal coordinate systems. See the Modeling and Meshing Guide for more details about nodal coordinate systems.
The program aligns the internal DOFs with the nodal coordinate systems as defined by the nodes on the
element face or edge.
Displacement constraints applied to nodes with rotated nodal coordinate systems are applied to the
internal DOFs on an element edge or face only if ALL the nodes defining that edge or face are also rotated
into that same coordinate system (see Figure 15.6,Constraints on Rotated Nodes).Therefore any symStructural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
369
Caution
If all of the DOFs of the nodes on an edge (or face) are not fully constrained (are only partially
constrained, e.g. only UX is constrained) and the nodal rotations of these nodes are not the
same, the stress results at these nodes may be inaccurate if the p-level of the attached elements exceeds 3.
Nodal coordinate systems which are not necessarily parallel to the global Cartesian system are formed
when you invoke symmetry or antisymmetry displacement constraints on model surfaces.
Caution
Observe the following cautions:
370
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
You should avoid applying single-point loads or constraints, since they cause stress singularities. If these loads or constraints are applied, exclude the elements attached to
these nodes from the convergence computations. See the "Accounting for Stress Singularities" section later in this chapter.
Do not apply forces and moments to the midside nodes.You may only apply these loads
at the corner nodes. In addition, out-of-plane (element ROTZ) moments may not be applied to SHELL150.
Pressures (PRES) are surface loads, also usually applied on the model exterior. Positive values of pressure
act towards the element face (resulting in a compressive effect).
Temperatures (TEMP) are applied to study the effects of thermal expansion or contraction (that is, thermal
stresses).The coefficient of thermal expansion must be defined if thermal strains are to be calculated.
You can read in temperatures from a thermal analysis, or you can specify temperatures directly on the
nodes or the solid model keypoints.
To obtain temperatures from a thermal analysis:
Convert the p-element types to the following thermal element types: PLANE145 to PLANE77, PLANE146
to PLANE35, SOLID147 to SOLID90, and SOLID148 to SOLID87.There is no thermal equivalent for
SHELL150.
Change the element types back to the p-element types in order to perform the p-method structural
analysis.
For the remainder of the analysis, continue with the same procedure as defined for h-elements (see
the Thermal Analysis Guide).
Gravity, spinning, etc. are inertia loads that affect the entire structure. Density must be defined if inertia
effects are to be included.
4.
Specify load step options.The following solution options are available to aid in solving a p-Method
analysis:
As mentioned earlier in this section, a p-method analysis works with a series of iterations, or loops,
checking for convergence each time.The PPRANGE command is used to specify the overall range where
the p-level may vary (somewhere between 2 and 8). For analyses beginning at p=2, each element will
have its solution checked for convergence against established criteria [PCONV]. If the solution is within
the requested tolerance [PMOPTS], that element will have its p-level held to 2.Those elements that did
not converge within the specified criteria (that is, not fixed at p=2 for the first iteration), will have their
p-level increased, and another solution (iteration) will then be performed. At each iteration the convergence criteria (strain energy, displacement, stress, etc.) is checked, and if converged, the solution stops.
Also, those elements whose individual solutions are considered to be converged will have their p-level
held at the current p-level.This process is continued until all specified convergence criteria are met, or
the maximum p-range has been reached.
Convergence Criteria Specifications
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
371
Caution
Do not specify stress or strain criteria at nodes where there are singularities or at nodes along
material interfaces.These locations will not converge due to the singularity.
When choosing locations for specifying convergence criteria, you should concentrate your monitoring
in the areas of high stress or at the point of maximum displacement rather than where stresses, strains,
or displacements are relatively insignificant.
Specifications for Controlling p-levels
You may specify the starting (defaults to 2) and maximum (defaults to 8) p-levels that you wish to allow
for your analysis [PPRANGE].You may wish to start at a higher p-level if you have already completed an
analysis and you want to perform a re-analysis (for a design change, for instance) and you know the final
p-level where convergence will occur for most elements.You may also want to restrict the maximum plevel to less than 8 if conserving disk space or run time.
Adjust the starting and maximum p-level in portions of your model using element KEYOPT selections.
Accounting for Stress Singularities
If the model contains any re-entrant (internal or concave) corners that are not modeled with a fillet radius,
or contains point loads or any other areas of stress singularities, you should consider excluding these
areas from the convergence computations. All elements that have a node at the singularity should be
excluded. One exception applies to fracture mechanics. In that situation, you should not exclude elements
at or near the crack tip.
Command(s): PEXCLUDE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> p-Method> Strain Energy> Exclude Elems
You can reassign, or re-include, elements for convergence checking.You may determine which elements
have been included or excluded by listing [PINCLUDE,STAT; PEXCLUDE,STAT; or *GET] or plotting elements [EPLOT]. Excluded elements will appear `whited-out' in the plot.You may also select included or
excluded elements by issuing the ESEL command directly [ESEL,,PEXC or ESEL,,PINC] (no GUI equivalent).
This facilitates using these elements as a component [CM].
Command(s): PINCLUDE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> p-Method> Strain Energy> Include Elems
372
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
6.
Start the p-level iterations and solution process.The output will provide a summary of each loop, indicating the current p-level, the convergence statistics, and the status of how many elements have converged.
Command(s): SOLVE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS
Caution
You may not restart a p-method analysis.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
373
The results from a p-method analysis are written to the results file, Jobname.RST.They consist of the following
data:
Primary data
Nodal displacements (UX, UY, ROTX, etc.)
Derived data
Nodal and element stresses, nodal and element strains, element forces
Note
You must read the results data from the results file (Jobname.RST) into the database [SET] before
displacements may be reviewed during postprocessing.Thermal strains are not available on the
results file.
The tools used for time-history postprocessing [/POST26] are also applicable to p-method analyses, but have
limited functionality, since p-element technology is restricted to linear static analyses. In this section we will explain
those procedures that deviate from standard postprocessing, such as some plotting and printing operations,
etc. Before reading this section, it would be a good idea to review the chapters on postprocessing in the Basic
Analysis Guide for more details on postprocessing, in general.
x
x
374
x
x
NUM = 2
x
x
physical node
pseudo node
NUM = 4
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Note
Results values for SHELL150 are displayed for the top and bottom layer simultaneously.
When viewing nodal field values across p-element boundaries ([PRNSOL, PLNSOL], or when using the Query
function), results may be displayed in various ways.The results data may be averaged along element boundaries
with the AVRES command.You can average results at all boundaries (the default), or at all boundaries except
where real constant, and/or material type discontinuities exist. If a geometric discontinuity exists, results will not
be averaged at those locations.
Note
AVRES has no effect on the nodal degree of freedom solution values (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ,
etc.).
For all of the p-elements, displacement plots are available with both undisplaced structure and undisplaced
edge options [PLDISP]. When using PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER], displaced shape plots reflect each
calculated element subgrid [/EFACET] displacement.
For PLANE145, PLANE146, SOLID147, and SOLID148, stresses and strains can be listed [PRESOL] at all node locations for each element. Results for SHELL150 are listed for the top, middle, and bottom layers with results for
the bottom layer listed first.
Printout is similar to that for h-elements, with nodal results being unaveraged and sorted by element number.
Unlike higher order h-element printout, results are for all nodal locations (corner and midside nodes). Results
may be printed or plotted for the entire model [/GRAPHICS,FULL] or for the model surface only [/GRAPHICS,POWER].
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
375
Note
Issuing the /PMETH,ON command or defining a p-element [ET] will activate PowerGraphics unless
a prior /GRAPHICS,FULL command has been issued. Similarly, /PMETH,OFF will deactivate PowerGraphics unless /GRAPHICS,POWER has been issued previously.
10
Specify convergence
criteria for SX
(1% tolerance)
r=5
Apply a pressure on the line
at -100 lb/in2
20
= Boundary
constraints
P = (100)(10)(.25) = 250 lb
total force
376
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
2.
Type the text "p-Method Plate with Hole" and click on OK.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preferences.The Preferences for GUI Filtering dialog box appears.
2.
Click the Structural method on. Click the p-Method Struct. option on.
3.
Click on OK.
2.
3.
4.
5.
In the scroll box for Analysis type, scroll down to "Plane Stress+TK" to select it.
6.
Click on OK.
7.
2.
Click on Add.The Element Type for Real Constants dialog box appears.
3.
4.
5.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models.The Define Material Model Behavior dialog box appears.
2.
In the Material Models Available window, double-click on the icons next to the following options:
Structural, Linear, Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears.
3.
4.
Enter 0.29 for PRXY and click on OK. Material Model Number 1 appears in the Material Models Defined
window on the left.
5.
Choose menu path Material> Exit to remove the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Areas> Rectangle> By Dimensions.The Create Rectangle by Dimensions dialog box appears.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
377
Enter 0,20 for the X-coordinates and 0,10 for the Y-coordinates. Use the TAB key to move between fields.
3.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Areas> Circle> By Dimensions.
The Circular Area by Dimensions dialog box appears.
5.
6.
Click on OK.The circle appears on the ANSYS Graphics window, on the lower left corner of the rectangle.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate> Booleans> Subtract> Areas.
The Subtract Areas picking menu appears.
8.
9.
Click on OK in the picking menu. Another Subtract Areas picking menu appears.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> MeshTool.The MeshTool appears.
2.
Click the SmartSize check box on. Set the SmartSize slider to 5.
3.
In the Mesh section of the MeshTool, choose Areas and Free.Then click the MESH button.The Mesh
Areas picking menu appears.
4.
5.
6.
2.
3.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement>
Symmetry B.C.> On Nodes.The Apply SYMM on Nodes dialog box appears.
5.
Click on OK to accept the default of symmetric surface normal to X-axis.The displacement symbols appear
down the left edge of the drawing.
6.
7.
8.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement>
Symmetry B.C.> On Nodes.The Apply SYMM on Nodes dialog box appears.
9.
In the drop down menu for Symm surface is normal to, select "Y-axis."
10. Click OK.The displacement symbols appear along the bottom of the drawing.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities.The Select Entities dialog box appears.
2.
378
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Pressure> On Nodes.
The Apply PRES on Nodes picking menu appears.
5.
6.
7.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters.The Scalar Parameters dialog box
appears.
2.
3.
Click on Close.
4.
2.
Carefully review the information in the status window, and then close it.
3.
Click on OK in the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set.
2.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape.The Plot Deformed
Shape dialog box appears.
3.
Click the "Def + undeformed" option on. Click on OK.The deformed and undeformed shapes appear in
the ANSYS Graphics window.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu.The
Contour Nodal Solution Data dialog box appears.
5.
In the scroll box on the left, click once on "Stress" to select it. In the scroll box on the right, click once on
"X-direction SX" to select it.
6.
Click on OK. Review the graphic using the legend in the graphics window. Expected results are: Max
displacement = .97x10-4 in, and Max stress in X direction = 437 psi.
7.
8.
379
380
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
381
Define the section and associate a section ID number with the section subtype.
2.
ANSYS supplies the following commands for creating, viewing, and listing cross sections, and for managing cross
section libraries:
Purpose
Prints beam section results (not supported for
BEAM44)
SECTYPE
Associates section Subtype with SECID
SECDATA
Defines section geometry data
SECOFFSET
Defines section offset for beam cross sections
SECCONTROLS Overrides program calculated properties.
SECNUM
Identifies the SECID to be assigned to an element
SECPLOT
Plots geometry of a beam section to scale
SECWRITE
Creates an ASCII file containing user mesh or a
custom cross section
/SECLIB
Sets default section library path for SECREAD
SECREAD
Reads a user defined section library, mesh, or
custom cross section
SLIST
Summarizes section properties
SDELETE
Deletes a cross section
For complete documentation of the cross section commands, see the Commands Reference.
16.2.2. Defining Cross Section Geometry and Setting the Section Attribute Pointer
Use the SECDATA command to define the geometry of a cross section. Continuing with the example SECTYPE
command shown above, note that the CSOLID subtype has two dimensions: the radius and the number of cells
382
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
invoking SECTYPE,,,,,REFINEKEY to set the level of mesh refinement for thin-walled sections (CTUBE,
CHAN, I, Z, L, T, HATS, and HREC)
specifying the number of divisions using SECDATA for solid sections (RECT, QUAD, and CSOLID)
The thin wall sections have a minimum of two integration points through thickness, so results produced using
thin wall sections should be acceptable for materially nonlinear analysis.
However, when doing a plasticity analysis, the cell defaults may need to be changed for the solid sections. Here
are examples of ANSYS-generated solid section cell meshes and the type of analysis you may wish to use them
with.
Default 2 x 2 Mesh
4 x 4 Graded Mesh
Captures plasticity
through thickness and
the onset of plasticity
at the boundary
1 x 4 Mesh
for 2-D behavior
The material set attribute pointer to be associated with the generated beam elements.
383
The orientation of the cross section with respect to the beam element axis. For detailed information about
orientation nodes and beams, see Section 7.5.2: Generating a Beam Mesh With Orientation Nodes in the
Modeling and Meshing Guide.
Issue the LATT command to associate these attributes with the selected, unmeshed line:
Command(s): LATT, MAT, , TYPE, , KB, KE, SECNUM
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Picked LinesSee the LATT command
description for the meaning of MAT and TYPE.
The following arguments are described here in terms of their applicability to beams.
KB
Corresponds to any keypoint number in the model. All beam elements generated will have their beam section
oriented such that the beam z-axis will lie in the plane defined by two line end keypoints and this keypoint
number.
KE
Corresponds to any keypoint number in the model (optional).This keypoint determines the beam orientation
at the end of the line as described above. If KE is given,KB determines the beam orientation at the beginning
of the line.This is useful for creating twisted beams.
SECNUM
Corresponds to the beam section defined by the SECTYPE command with the section ID number as given
by the SECNUM.
common sections
custom sections
Common sections are described by a standard geometry and a single material. Custom sections are defined by
an arbitrary geometry and may consist of several isotropic materials.
In addition, you can use defined sections to create tapered beams (for BEAM188 and BEAM189 only). See Section 16.3.5: Defining a Tapered Beam for more information.
384
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
The top part of the BeamTool relates a section ID number to a subtype (and, optionally, a section name) [SECTYPE].
The middle of the BeamTool defines the section offset information, if needed [SECOFFSET].The bottom contains
the fields for section geometry information [SECDATA].The dimensions defined by the SECDATA command
are determined by the subtype selected. For documentation about a particular variant of the BeamTool, select
the subtype that you want information about, and then click on the Help button on the BeamTool.The subtype
dimensions are also documented in the SECDATA command description.
2.
Overlap the areas (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate> Booleans> Overlap> Areas) or
glue them (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate> Booleans> Glue> Areas) where appropriate.
3.
4.
Set the number of line divisions for all lines (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls>
ManualSize> Lines> Picked Lines or use the MeshTool).
5.
Select Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Write From Areas. A picker
appears. Pick the area(s) of the cells.
6.
ANSYS creates cells on the areas. ANSYS may display bad shape messages during the mesh - these
messages can be ignored. However, you may see an "Unable to mesh area ...." message. If you do, clear
the elements from all areas (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Clear> Areas) and repeat steps 4
and 5.
7.
Write the .SECT file out to a unique name in the Write Section Library File dialog box and click on OK.
8.
Read in the user mesh file (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Read Sect
Mesh) to calculate the section properties. Material properties must be defined to calculate the cross
section shear correction factors, material-weighted centroids and the shear centers.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
385
Note
Even if you have already set LESIZE, you will see the following message:
Line element sizes may need to be specified for desired cross-section mesh. Please refer to the
LESIZE command.
If you have already set the line element size, click on the Close button to continue. If you have not
already set it, issue LESIZE with the appropriate information.
When creating cells on the area using the GUI, you do not need to define a plane element type. On
the other hand, a plane element type must be defined if the user issues the SECWRITE command
explicitly. MESH200 with KEYOPT(1) = 7 and PLANE82 are the only valid plane element types.
16.3.3. Creating Custom Cross Sections with Mesh Refinement and Multiple Materials
When performing a plasticity analysis, you may need to refine the cross section mesh. A cross section consisting
of more than one material may be defined to represent layers, reinforcements or sensors.When defining a multiplematerial cross section, you will need to specify the material that each cross section cell is made of.You can take
a previously-created cross section and modify it.
To create a custom cross section with a refined mesh and/or multiple materials, perform the following tasks:
1.
Either read a common section (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns>
Edit/Built-up> Edit Common) from the ANSYS database or read a custom section from a .SECT file.
(Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Edit/Built-up> Edit Custom)
2.
3.
Refine the section mesh. (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Edit/Builtup> Refine Mesh)
4.
Modify the cell materials. (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Edit/Builtup> Modify Material) If you want to create a multiple-material section, define the materials.This is necessary to calculate the shear correction factors and material-weighted centroids.
5.
Save the section to a .SECT file using SECWRITE (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam>
Custom Sectns> Edit/Built-up> Save).
6.
To calculate the section properties and use a custom section in the analysis, read in the user mesh file
(Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Read Sect Mesh).
Note
If you redefine a material after creating the section, you must reissue the SECTYPE and SECREAD
commands to recompute the cross section.
When a cross section has multiple materials, and /ESHAPE is used to produce contour plots of stresses
(and other quantities), the element averages the stresses across material boundaries.To limit this
behavior, use small cross section cells around the material boundaries.
When using the SECWRITE command explicitly, a section with multiple materials can be created by
assigning material attributes to the areas. During meshing, the elements inherit the material attribute
from the area and this attribute is written to the .SECT file.
A material number (MAT) specified for a custom section overrides any existing material setting.
386
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Note
If you redefine a material after creating the section, you must reissue the SECREAD command to
recompute the cross section.
You can save composite cross sections as custom cross sections. For information on custom cross sections, see
Section 16.3.1: Using the Beam Tool to Create Common Cross Sections
Continuing with this example, you can then use 3 as the taper section ID when assigning mesh attributes with
the SECNUM or LATT command.The resulting beam cross section is (0.0001*0.5) at end 1, and linearly tapers
to (3*0.5) at end 2.
The following assumptions apply to tapered beams defined with this method:
The arbitrary beam section type (ASEC on the SECTYPE command) is not supported for tapered beams.
The program performs a number of checks (although not completely comprehensive) to ensure topological
equality.The following items are compared:
section type
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
387
KEYOPT(12) = 1 - Average cross section analysis (an approximation of the order of the mesh size, but faster)
N
E
0
I1 ( 1,T )
1
M
1
E
I2 ( 2 ,T )
M2
2
=
JG ( ,T )
S1
1
G
0
A1 ( 1,T )
S2
2
G
A2 ( 2 ,T )
where:
N = Axial force
M1 = Bending moment in plane XZ
M2 = Bending moment in plane XY
= Torque
S1 = Transverse shear force in plane XZ
S2 = Transverse shear force in plane XY
= Axial strain
1 = Curvature in plane XZ
388
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Table 16.2 ANSYS Commands for Specifying Nonlinear General Beam Section Data
Command
BSAX [1]
BSM1 [1]
BSM2 [1]
BSTQ [1]
BSS1 [1]
BSS2 [1]
BSMD [2]
BSTE [2]
1.
2.
Temperature dependencies (T) You can define each of the generalized section data components as temperature-dependent. It is possible to specify up to six temperatures (T) by reissuing any command as necessary. If
you issue a command for a temperature specified earlier, the most recent data supersedes the previous value.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
389
!
!
!
!
Elasto-plastic response
Axial strain 0.0008, Force of 200
Axial strain 0.001 , Force of 240
Axial Strain 0.0014, Force of 300
ANSYS conventions for defining a uniaxial elasto-plastic response apply.The range of strain values must cover
the anticipated maximum deformation of the structure. For all nonlinear beam section specifications, the stiffness
disappears if the structural response is beyond the maximum strain value of the section data.You can define a
maximum of 20 generalized stress-strain points at each temperature value, and the successive slopes must be
smaller than the first slope. Isotropic hardening is assumed for the material response.
For a plastic nonlinear beam section subtype (SECTYPE,,GENB,PLASTIC), you must define all section components
with two or more stress-strain points. However, you can define a linear behavior for any section component by
specifying a larger maximum strain value. Following is an example where axial behavior is nonlinear, but bending
response is linear:
sectype,1,genb,plastic
bsax,0.0008,200
bsax,0.001 ,240
bsax,0.0014,300
! bending
bsm1,0.1,10000
bsm1,1,100000
! Elasto-plastic response
For an elastic nonlinear beam section subtype (SECTYPE,,GENB,ELASTIC), a single stress-strain point is adequate
for defining linear behavior.
The section data defined by each command listed in Table 16.2,ANSYS Commands for Specifying Nonlinear
General Beam Section Data is associated with the section most recently defined via the SECTYPE command.
Beam stresses are not available for output; however, the stress resultants are available as ETABLE quantities.
390
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
391
2.
Enter the text "Lateral Torsional Buckling Analysis" and click on OK.
392
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Start the model creation preprocessor and define the keypoints for the beam. Choose menu path
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Keypoints> In Active CS, and enter these keypoint
numbers and the coordinates in the dialog box as indicated:
Keypoint
Number
1
2
3
X Location
Y Location
Z Location
0
100.0
50
0
0
5
0
0
0
4.
Create a straight line through keypoints 1 and 2. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor>
Modeling> Create> Lines> Lines> Straight Line.The Create Straight Line picker appears. Select keypoints 1 and 2 in the Graphics window and click on OK in the Create Straight Line picker.
5.
Save the model. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Save As. Enter buckle.db in the Save Database
to box and click on OK.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preferences and select the "Structural" check box. Click on OK to
continue.
2.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete.The Element Types
dialog box appears.
3.
4.
In the scroll box on the left, click on "Structural Beam" to select it.
5.
In the scroll box on the right, click on "3D finite strain, 3 node 189" to select BEAM189.
6.
Click on OK, and then click on Close in the Element Types dialog box.
7.
Define a rectangular cross section for the beam. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Common Sectns.The BeamTool is displayed. ANSYS sets the section ID to 1, and the
subtype to RECT (signified by a rectangle on the subtype button) by default. Since you will be creating
a rectangular cross section, there is no need to change the subtype.
8.
In the lower half of the BeamTool, you will see a diagram of the cross section shape with dimension
variables labeled. Enter the width of the cross section, 0.2, in the box labeled B. Enter the height of the
cross section, 5.0, in the box labeled H. Click on Apply to set the cross section dimensions.
9.
Use the BeamTool to display information about the cross section. Click on the Preview button on the
BeamTool. A diagram and data summary of the cross section appear in the Graphics window.You can
also preview the mesh of the cross section by selecting the Meshview button. Click on the Close button
in the BeamTool to continue.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models.The Define Material Model Behavior dialog box appears.
2.
In the Material Models Available window on the right, double-click on the following: Structural, Linear,
Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears.
3.
4.
Enter 0.0 for PRXY (Poisson's ratio), and click on OK. Material Model Number 1 appears in the Material
Models Defined window on the left.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
393
Choose menu path Material> Exit to close the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box.
6.
Replot the line by choosing menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Lines.
7.
Select the line and define the orientation node of the line as an attribute. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Picked Lines.The Line Attributes picker appears. Select
the line in the Graphics window and click on Apply in the Line Attributes picker.
8.
The Line Attributes dialog box appears. ANSYS includes the material attribute pointer to the material
set 1, the element type attribute pointer to the local element type 1, and the section attribute pointer
to the section ID 1 by default. Click on the radio button beside the Pick Orientation Keypoint(s) label to
change it to Yes and click on OK.
9.
The Line Attributes picker reappears.Type 3 in the picker, press the Enter key, and click on OK.
10. Save the model. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Save As. If the buckle.db file is not already
selected, select it. Select OK, and when ANSYS prompts you if you want to overwrite the existing file,
click on OK.
Define the mesh size and number of divisions. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing>
Size Cntrls> ManualSize> Lines> All Lines. Enter 10 in the No. of Element Divisions box and click on
OK.
2.
Mesh the line. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> MeshTool. Click on MESH
on the MeshTool and the Mesh Lines picker appears. Pick the line in the Graphics window, and then click
on OK in the Mesh Lines picker. Click on Close in the MeshTool to close it.
3.
Rotate the meshed line. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Pan, Zoom, Rotate.The Pan,
Zoom, Rotate tool appears. Select ISO and click on Close.The beam is rotated in the Graphics window.
4.
Verify the beam orientation. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Size and Shape. Select
the radio button next to the /ESHAPE label to turn /ESHAPE on and click on OK.
Define a boundary condition to the fixed end. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads>
Apply> Structural> Displacement> On Keypoints.The Apply U,ROT on KPs picker appears.
2.
Define keypoint 1 as the fixed end. In the picker, type 1, press the Enter key, then click on OK.The Apply
U,ROT on KPs dialog box appears.
3.
Click on "All DOF" to select it, and click on OK.The boundary condition information appears in the ANSYS
Graphics window at keypoint 1.
4.
Apply a force to the free end. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply>
Structural> Force/Moment> On Keypoints.The Apply F/M on KPs picker appears.
5.
Identify keypoint 2 as the free end.Type 2 in the picker, press the Enter key, and then click on OK.The
Apply F/M on KPs dialog box appears.
6.
7.
Enter 1 for the Force/moment value in the Apply F/M on KPs dialog box, and click on OK.The force
symbol appears in the ANSYS Graphics window at keypoint 2.
8.
Save the model. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Save As. If the buckle.db file is not already
selected, select it. Click on OK and when ANSYS prompts you if you want to overwrite the existing file,
click on OK again.
394
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Set analysis options. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type>
Analysis Options.The Static or Steady-State Analysis dialog box appears.
2.
Use the sparse solver for the solution. In the Static or Steady-State Analysis dialog box, make sure that
Sparse solver is selected in the drop down box beside the Equation solver label.
3.
Include prestress effect, which will be stored for later use in the eigenvalue buckling calculation. In the
drop down list labeled Stress stiffness or prestress, select "Prestress ON." Click on OK to close the Static
or Steady-State Analysis dialog box.
4.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the summary information in
the /STAT command window, then select Close from its menu bar. Click on OK in the Solve Current Load
Step window to begin the solution.
5.
When the Solution is Done! window appears, click on Close to close it.
6.
7.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis.
8.
9.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options.The Eigenvalue Buckling
Options dialog box appears. Select the Block Lanczos option. Enter 4 in the No. of modes to extract box,
then click on OK.
10. Set the element calculation key for the MXPAND command. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution>
Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single Expand> Expand Modes.
11. In the Expand Modes dialog box, enter 4 in the No. of modes to expand box, change the No to Yes beside
the Calculate elem results label, and click on OK.
12. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the summary information in
the /STAT command window, then select Close from its menu bar. Click on OK in the Solve Current Load
Step window to begin the solution.
13. When the Solution is Done! window appears, click on Close to close it.
14. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Size and Shape. Be sure the radio button beside
the label Display of element shapes ... (/ESHAPE) is set to On and click on OK.
15. Display the results summary. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Results Summary.
After you have reviewed the results, click on Close to close the window.
16. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set.
17. Plot the first mode shape of the beam. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results>
Deformed Shape.The Plot Deformed Shape dialog box appears. Select Def + undef edge and click on
OK.
18. Choose menu path Main Menu> Finish.
Introduce model imperfections calculated by the previous analysis. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Modeling> Update Geom. In the Update nodes using results file displacements dialog
box, enter 0.002 in the Scaling factor box, 1 in the Load step box, 1 in the Substep box, and file.rst in the
Selection box. Click on OK.
2.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis.
3.
395
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results File and be
sure the drop down lists display All Items and All entities respectively. Choose the Every substep for the
File write frequency radio button and click on OK.
5.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. Select the radio button
beside Large deform effects, then click on OK.
6.
Set the arc-length method, and set parameters for the termination of the solution. Choose menu path
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Nonlinear> Arc-Length Opts. Select the Arc-length method
on/off radio button and set it to On. Choose the pull down menu next to the Lab label and select Displacement lim. Enter 1.0 in the Max desired U box. Enter 2 in the Node number for VAL box. Choose the
pull down menu next to the Degree of freedom label and select UZ. Click on OK.
7.
Define the number of substeps to be run during this load step. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution>
Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time and Substps. Enter 10000 in the Number of substeps box and
click on OK.
8.
Solve the current model. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the
summary information in the /STAT command window, then select Close from its menu bar. Click on OK
in the Solve Current Load Step window to begin the solution. A Nonlinear Solution window with a Stop
button appears. A convergence graph is built, and can take several minutes to complete.
9.
You may receive a warning message.You should review the information in the message but you do not
need to close it. Continue waiting for the solution to complete. When the Solution is Done! window appears, click on Close to close it.
Replot the beam. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Elements.
2.
Define the load point deflection to be read from the results file. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist
PostPro> Define Variables. When the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box appears, select Add.
3.
When the Add Time-History Variable dialog box appears, be sure the Nodal DOF result option is selected.
Click on OK.
4.
The Define Nodal Data picker appears. In the Graphics window, pick node 2 (the end node on the right
side of the beam) and click on OK.
5.
The Define Nodal Data dialog box appears. Be sure the Ref number of variable and Node number are
both set to 2. Enter TIPLATDI in the User-specified label box. Select Translation UZ from the menu and
click on OK.
6.
Define the total reaction force to be read from the results file. Choose Add from the Defined Time-History
Variables dialog box.
7.
When the Add Time-History Variable dialog box appears, choose the Reaction forces radio button and
then click on OK.
8.
The Define Reaction Force picker appears. Pick the end node on the left side of the beam and click on
OK.
9.
The Define Reaction Force Variable dialog box appears. Be sure the Ref number of variable is set to 3 and
Node number is set to 1. Select Struct Force FY from the menu and click on OK. Click on Close to close
the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Math Operations> Multiply. In the Multiply TimeHistory Variables dialog box, enter 4 in the Reference number for result box, -1.0 in the 1st Factor box,
and 3 in the 1st Variable box. Click on OK.
396
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Replot the beam. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Elements.
2.
Define the compression stress at the base to be read from the results file. Choose menu path Main
Menu> TimeHist PostPro> Define Variables. When the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box
appears, select Add.
3.
When the Add Time-History Variable dialog box appears, be sure the by seq no. option is selected.
Click on OK.
4.
The Define Element Results picker appears. In the Graphics window, pick element 1 (the end element
on the left side of the beam) and click on OK.
5.
The Define Element Results by Seq No. dialog box appears. Be sure the Ref number of variable is set to
5 and Element number is set to 1. Enter BASESX in the User-specified label box. Select LS from the menu.
6.
To retrieve the X component of Stress from the bottom middle of the section (this is node 3, or the 2nd
node where stress is stored), type 4 for the Comp Sequence number and click on OK.
7.
Plot variable versus time. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist PostPro> Graph Variables. Enter
5 in the 1st variable to graph box. Click on OK.
8.
List the variable versus time. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist PostPro> List Variables. Enter
5 in the 1st variable to list box and click on OK.
9.
397
398
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Define the section and associate a section ID number with the section.
2.
ANSYS supplies the following commands for creating, viewing, and listing cross sections, and for managing cross
section libraries:
399
Purpose
Defines section offset for shell cross sections
Plots geometry of a shell section to scale
Summarizes section properties
Deletes a cross section
For complete documentation of the cross section commands, see the Commands Reference.
Figure 17.1,Plot of a Shell Section shows the layer stacking of a shell section.The layer order, along with material
and orientation of each layer, is represented here:
400
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
401
The top part of the Layup page of the ShellTool relates a section ID number to a Shell section type (and, optionally,
a section name) [SECTYPE].The middle part of the page of the ShellTool defines each layer in the positive Z
direction of the element [SECDATA]. Note that the order of the rows in the spreadsheet ascends up the page,
resembling that stacking of the layers. (Integration point data for each layer is ignored by thermal shell elements.)
The bottom contains the fields for section offset information, if needed [SECOFFSET].You can define tapered
shells by specifying a section function relating thickness to global coordinates [SECFUNCTION].
The transverse shear stiffness, hourglass coefficients and drill stiffness of the sections are calculated from the
section geometry and material properties.The default added mass per unit area of the section is always zero.
On the Section Controls page, you can override the program calculated quantities [SECCONTROLS]. (The Section
Controls page does not apply to thermal shell elements.)
402
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
T
B
I M
(T - T )
T
D
B
[S] = [E]{{ }
where:
{N} = {N11, N22, N12} are membrane stress resultants per unit length
{M} ={M11, M22, M12} are bending stress resultants per unit length
{} = {11 , 22, 12} are membrane strains
{} = {11,22,12} are curvatures
{S} = {S1, S2} are transverse shear forces per unit length
{}={1,2 } are transverse shear strains
[A], [B], [D], and [E] are the section-stiffness matrices for membrane, coupling, bending, and shear behavior,
respectively
{MT} are stress resultants caused by a unit rise in temperature on a fully constrained model
{BT} are bending-related stress resultants caused by a unit rise in temperature on a fully constrained model
TI is the stress-free initial temperature
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
403
Table 17.2 ANSYS Commands for Specifying Preintegrated Shell Section Data
Command
SSPA
SSPB [1]
SSPD [1]
SSPE [1]
SSMT
SSBT [1]
SSPM
1.
If you are using the SHELL181 or SHELL281 element's Membrane option (KEYOPT(1) = 1), it is not necessary
to issue the SSPB, SSPD, SSPE, and SSBT commands. In this case, the only relevant quantities are
membrane stiffness (SSPA), membrane thermal effects (SSMT), and density (SSPM).
Temperature dependencies (T) You can define each of the preintegrated shell section data as temperaturedependent. It is possible to specify up to six temperatures (T) by reissuing any command as necessary. If you issue
a command for a temperature specified earlier, the most recent data supersedes the previous value.
The section data defined by each command listed in Table 17.2,ANSYS Commands for Specifying Preintegrated Shell Section Data is associated with the section most recently defined via the SECTYPE command.
Shell stresses are not available for output; however, the stress resultants are available as ETABLE quantities.
The thickness of the shell is assumed to remain constant even in a large-strain analysis.
404
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
The preintegrated stiffness components must yield a positive definite section stiffness at analysis time.
If using preintegrated shell sections in a contact analysis, ANSYS recommends the pure Lagrange multiplier
method.
For standard layered-shell sections, you can obtain submatrices [A], [B], [D], and [E] via the SLIST command's
FULL option.
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
405
406
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Index
A
adaptive descent, 222
adequate mesh density, 241
alpha (mass) damping, 68, 123, 146
alternating stress intensity, 351
amplitude
of harmonic loads, 63
analysis
reduced transient dynamic, 106
analysis options
harmonic response analysis
mode superposition method, 83
modal analysis, 62, 77
nonlinear static structural analysis, 219
single-point spectrum analysis, 131
transient dynamic analysis
mode-superposition method, 101
reduced method, 106
analysis type
buckling, 155
full transient, 93
harmonic response, 59
modal, 33
nonlinear structural, 169
p-method, 361
spectrum, 129
static structural, 56
structural, 1
transient dynamic, 87
animation
gasket results, 302
anisotropic, 178
anisotropic hyperelasticity, 190
applying loads, 34, 62, 77, 226, 230
harmonic response analysis, 63
increments for buckling analysis, 156
nonlinear analysis, 226
p-method, 368
structural static analysis, 1213
transient dynamic analysis, 96
using TABLE array parameters, 13
arc-length method, 9, 157, 170
compared to nonlinear stabilization method, 239
results checking, 239
understanding, 238
automatic time stepping, 123, 156, 244
creep, 194
large strain, 175
plasticity, 177
C
calculating
covariance in POST26, 151
cast iron plasticity, 178
causes of nonlinear behavior, 170
changing status, 170
geometric nonlinearities, 170
material nonlinearities, 170
cells
defining for a section, 383
Chaboche model, 178
changing
status, 170
combinations
material model, 198
composite cross section, 387
composites
element types for, 337
FiberSIM-ANSYS interface, 346
guidelines, 343
how to model, 337
introduction to, 337
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
407
Index
layer properties, 339
concrete, 178, 191, 233
constant damping ratio, 68, 123, 131, 146
constitutive matrices, 341
constraint equations, 367
with QR damped method, 53
contact, 170
node-to-node, 233
contour displays, 16, 136, 162, 227, 302
activating, 44
control elements, 245
controlling cutbacks, 8
controlling p-levels, 368
controlling restarts, 8
convergence
checking, 220
enhancements, 241
failure, 241
convergence criteria, 220
default value, 220
disjointed structures, 220
displacement checking, 220
force checking, 220
p-method, 368
vector norms, 220
convergence tolerances, 8
coupling, 343, 366
covariance
calculating, 151
creating
sections, 382, 399
beam tool, 384
creep, 176, 191
automatic time stepping, 194
explicit, 191, 224
explicit creep procedure, 194
implicit, 191, 224
implicit creep procedure, 192
material curve fitting, 266
ratio, 224
creep criteria, 11, 224
creep strain rate, 191
cross sections (see sections) (see Sections)
composite, 387
custom convergence criteria, 220
cutback criteria, 8
CUTCONTROL command
changes through SOLCONTROL, 222
cyclic hardening/softening, 178
D
damped method
408
E
eigenvalue analysis, 33
eigenvalue buckling, 155
eigenvalue buckling solution
buckling analysis, 159
eigenvalue calculation
shift point, 159
eigenvalue extraction methods, 159
eigenvalues, 33
number to be extracted, 159
eigenvectors, 33
elastomers, 186
element birth and death, 233
element damping, 123
element loads, 82
element types
structural, 2
elements
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Index
associating sec IDs with, 382, 399
engineering strain, 175
engineering stress, 175
epoxy, 337
equation solvers, 8, 62, 219, 368
equilibrium iterations, 170, 221
number of, 8, 221
error estimation, 16
example problems
beam analysis, 398
buckling analysis, 167
harmonic response analysis, 77
modal analysis, 47
nonlinear analysis, 258
reduced transient dynamic analysis, 127
single-point response spectrum analysis, 145
static analysis, 31
excitation direction, 131
expand
single solution, 111
expand the modes, 41
single-point response spectrum analysis, 134
expand the solution
buckling analysis, 161
reduced harmonic response analysis, 79
expanded modes
number to use, 131
expanded solution
review results, 112
expansion frequency range, 41
expansion pass, 79
activating, 41, 79, 111
buckling analysis, 161
harmonic response analysis
mode superposition method, 84
reduced method, 79
transient dynamic analysis
mode-superposition method, 105
reduced method, 111
expansion pass options
harmonic response analysis (reduced), 79
modal analysis, 41
transient dynamic analysis (reduced), 111
explicit creep, 191
explicit creep procedure, 194
extra element shapes, 245
extracting modes, 33
extrapolation of results, 11, 68, 79, 111, 226
F
failure criteria, 342
maximum strain, 342
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
409
Index
introduction to, 315
J-Integral, 317
J-Integral evaluation process, 323
numerical evaluation of parameters, 322
overview, 315
parameters, 316
stress-intensity factor, 316
free meshing, 365
free-body analysis (see inertia relief )
frequency range for expansion, 41, 79
frequency vector, 151
frequency-dependent damping ratio, 146
full harmonic response analysis
procedure, 61
full transient dynamic analysis
procedure, 89
G
gap conditions, 101, 107
and QR Damped method, 101
gasket joints simulation
applications, 287
element topologies, 286
elements, 287
formulation, 286
introduction to, 285
materials, 288
meshing, 295
output listing, 300
plotting data, 295
procedure, 285
results, 301
sample problem, 303
solution, 299
thickness, 287
gasket results
animation, 302
POST1, 302
POST26, 303
reviewing, 302
tabular listing, 302
geometric nonlinearities, 170, 175
geometry data for sections, 382, 399
geometry data of a section, 382, 400
glass, 196
guyan reduction, 54
H
harmonic forcing frequency, 63
harmonic response analysis
full method, 61
procedure, 61
410
introduction to, 59
methods of solution, 60
mode superposition method
procedure, 82
sample input, 85
prestressed, 86
reduced method, 77
sample input, 81
uses for, 59
harmonic solutions
number of, 67
Hill anisotropy, 178
hyperelasticity, 176, 186
anisotropic, 190
Arruda-Boyce model, 189
Blatz-Ko foam model, 189
Gent model, 189
large strain, 186
material curve fitting, 259
Mooney-Rivlin model, 187
neo-Hookean model, 188
Ogden compressible foam model, 190
Ogden model, 188
polynomial form model, 188
user-defined option, 190
Yeoh model, 189
I
implicit creep, 191
implicit creep procedure, 192
inertia relief, 13
calculating, 13
output, 14
partial, 14
initial accelerations, 90
initial conditions
transient dynamic analysis
full method, 90
mode-superposition method, 101
reduced method, 108
initial displacement, 90
initial velocity, 90
integration point, 226
integration time step, 87, 93, 101, 109
guidelines for, 120
interface
delamination , 307
elements, 308
material model, 2
materials, 309
meshing, 309
results, 310
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Index
K
kinematic analysis, 230, 244
KSPIN [OMEGA], 176
L
large deflection and load direction, 174
large deformation effects, 6, 93, 156, 175176, 230
large strain
analyses, 175, 178
automatic time stepping, 175
hyperelasticity, 186
logarithmic strain, 175
true stress, 175
viscoplasticity, 195
layer orientation angle, 339
layer thickness, 339
layered elements, 337
libraries
sections, 391, 403
library paths
for cross sections, 382
line element results, 16, 44
line search option, 8, 222, 244
listing
master DOF, 44
section properties, 382, 399
section results, 382
listings
tabular, 45
load step options, 41, 79, 111
buckling analysis, 161
eigenvalue buckling, 159
harmonic response analysis
full method, 67
mode superposition method, 83
reduced method, 77
modal analysis, 39
mode-superposition transient dynamic analysis,101
Newton-Raphson, 223
p-method, 368
reduced transient dynamic analysis, 108
spectrum analysis
PSD, 146
single-point, 131
time, 101
transient dynamic analysis, 97
full method, 97
mode-superposition method, 101
reduced method, 108
load steps, 170
applying for transient loading, 97
load types, 12
M
macros, 15
mass damping, 123
mass matrix formulation, 10, 37, 62, 96
master degrees of freedom
selection of, 54
master DOF (MDOF), 54, 107
master DOFs
definition of, 37
material curve fitting, 259
creep, 266
viscoelastic, 274
material model
combinations, 198
material model interface, 2
material models
shape memory alloy, 194
material nonlinearities, 170, 176
material properties, 363
fatigue, 352
material curve fitting, 259
nonlinear, 176
material-dependent damping, 123
matrix reduction, 54
theory of, 54
maximum strain failure criterion, 342
maximum stress failure criterion, 342
MDOF, 37
memory saving
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
411
Index
when generating stiffness matrix, 219
meshing
a line for a section, 383
p-element, 364
metal forming, 195
middle step residual, 120
midside nodes
p-element, 364
MINREF [CNVTOL], 220
modal analysis
applying loads, 38
brake squeal prestressed, 49
introduction to, 33
large deflection prestressed, 48
listing natural frequencies, 44
mode-extraction methods, 35, 50
options, 34
prestressed, 48
process, 33
residual vector method, 56
modal damping, 123, 131
modal solution
obtaining, 100
single-point response spectrum analysis, 131
mode combination methods, 134
mode extraction methods
QR Damped, 131
mode numbers, 11
mode superposition
harmonic response analysis, 82
mode-extraction methods, 82
mode superposition method, 61
mode-extraction methods, 35, 50
Block Lanczos, 35, 51, 82
damped, 35, 53
PCG Lanczos, 35, 52
QR Damped, 35, 8283, 100
QR damped, 53, 101
reduced, 35, 52
subspace, 35, 52
unsymmetric, 35, 52
mode-frequency analysis, 33
mode-superposition
transient dynamic analysis, 100
mode-superposition method, 88
mode-superposition transient dynamic analysis
obtain the modal solution, 100
obtain the mode-superposition transient solution,
101
model geometry
defining, 364
modes
412
expanding, 41
number of, 41
number to expand, 36
number to extract, 36
Mohr-Coulomb, 178
MONITOR command
changes from SOLCONTROL, 225
MPRS analysis, 154
multi-point response spectrum, 129
multilinear elastic, 176
multilinear elasticity, 185
multilinear isotropic hardening, 178
multilinear kinematic hardening, 178
N
Newton-Raphson, 170
Newton-Raphson option, 10
Newton-Raphson options, 223
NLHIST command
monitor results in real time, 225
nodal coordinate systems
p-method, 368
nodal forces and moments, 16
nodal solution listing format, 79
nonlinear analysis
tips and guidelines, 240
nonlinear behavior
causes, 170
nonlinear diagnostics, 241
nonlinear general beam sections, 388
nonlinear isotropic hardening, 178
nonlinear kinematic hardening, 178
nonlinear material properties
material curve fitting, 259
nonlinear stabilization
activating, 234
artificial dashpot elements, 236
compared to arc-length method, 239
constant or reduced, 235
controlling, 234
energy dissipation ratio, 234
results checking, 237
tips and hints, 237
understanding, 234
nonlinear structural analysis
automatic time stepping, 244
buckling, 156
conservative vs. nonconservative, 173
creep, 191
geometric nonlinearities, 175
hyperelasticity, 186
interpolation of results, 227
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Index
introduction to, 169
levels of operation, 170
load directions, 174
material nonlinearities, 176
nonlinear elements, 233
plasticity, 177
sample transient input, 232
swelling, 197
termination, 229
verifying results, 245
viscoelasticity, 196
viscoplasticity, 195
nonlinear transient analysis
procedure, 230
number of eigenvalues to be extracted, 159
number of harmonic solutions, 67
number of integration points per layer, 339
number of solutions to expand, 79
O
obtain the modal solution, 82
offsets
for sections, 382, 399
OPNCONTROL command
changes through SOLCONTROL, 224
output, 245
database and results file, 6, 41, 68, 79, 93, 101, 111,
161, 219
printed, 11, 41, 68, 79, 101, 110111, 161, 226
output control, 68, 101, 110, 161
output controls, 39, 41, 111, 159
P
p-elements
meshing, 364
real constants, 363
p-level
error-estimation range, 362
error-estimation techniques, 362
p-method, 361
benefits of, 361
guidelines for meshing, 365
internal DOFs, 368
load step options, 368
loads, 368
meshing the model, 364
p-element subgrid, 373
printing and plotting results, 375
querying subgrid results, 373, 375
reviewing results, 373
solving common problems, 373
specialized displays and listings, 376
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
413
Index
procedure, 86
prestressed modal analysis, 48
prestressed modal analysis of a large deflection, 48
prestressed mode superposition harmonic response
analysis
procedure, 86
prestressed mode-superposition transient dynamic
analysis
procedure, 120
prestressed reduced transient dynamic analysis
procedure, 120
printed output, 11, 68, 79, 101, 110111, 161, 226
printing and plotting node and element results
p-method, 375
PRNSOL command
with p-elements, 375
probabilistic analysis, 130
program-selected masters, 56
proportional limit, 177
PSD analysis, 145
PSD type, 146
PSD-versus-frequency table, 146
Q
QR Damped extraction method
harmonic analysis, 82
QR damped method
modal analysis, 35, 53
transient analysis, 101
QR Damped method
gap conditions, 101
harmonic analysis, 83
spectrum analysis, 131
transient analysis, 100
R
ramped loads, 67, 94, 101, 110, 230
random vibrations, 145
and power spectral density, 130
range counting, 360
ratcheting effect, 178
rate-dependent plasticity , 195
ratio
creep, 224
Rayleigh damping constants, 123
reaction forces and moments, 16
reading
user-defined mesh, 382
real constants
for layered elements, 339
reduced (Householder) method, 35
reduced analysis (see matrix reduction)
414
S
sample buckling analysis
command method, 167
GUI method, 163
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Index
sample harmonic response analysis
command method, 76
GUI method, 71
sample input
fatigue, 360
full transient dynamic analysis, 99
harmonic response analysis
mode superposition method, 85
reduced method, 81
mode-superposition transient analysis, 105
nonlinear structural
transient, 232
spectrum analysis
PSD, 152
transient dynamic analysis
mode-superposition method, 105
sample modal analysis
command method, 46
GUI method, 45
sample nonlinear analysis
command method, 255
GUI method, 247
sample p-method analysis
command method, 379
GUI method, 376
sample spectrum analysis
command method, 144
GUI method, 138
sample static analysis
command method, 29
GUI method, 18
sample transient dynamic analysis
command method, 118
GUI method, 113
sandwich structures, 341
scaling the load vector, 83
.SECT file, 385
sections, 399
associating subtypes with IDs, 382, 399
creating, 382, 399
beam tool, 384
defining dimensions, 382, 399
geometry data of, 382, 400
introduction to, 381
libraries of, 391, 403
meshing a line for, 383
solid, 383
thin wall, 383
shakedown effect, 178
shape memory alloy, 194
SHELL command
with p-elements, 375
shells, 399
preintegrated general sections, 403
shift point for eigenvalue calculation, 159
significant modes
expanding, 134
single solution to expand, 111
single-point response spectrum, 129
acceleration response, 134
CQC mode combination method, 134
displacement response, 134
DSUM mode combination method, 134
expanding significant modes, 134
GRP mode combination method, 134
mode combination methods, 134
NRLSUM mode combination method, 134
procedure, 130
SRSS mode combination method, 134
velocity response, 134
single-point spectrum analysis
load step option for, 131
slave DOF, 54
small deflection, 175
small strain analyses, 175
S-N curve, 352
soil, 178
solid sections, 383
solution
obtain the mode-superposition transient solution,
101
solution controls, 217
solution controls dialog box
full transient analysis, 93
defining analysis type and options, 93
static analysis, 6
solution listing format, 62
solution method
harmonic response, 62
solution methods, 60, 88
full, 88
transient dynamic analysis, 60
mode superposition, 61
mode-superposition , 88
reduced, 60, 89
solution termination, 9
solutions to be expanded, 111
solver, memory saving option, 219
solvers
equation, 8, 219, 368
sparse direct solver, 62
specifying a p-level range, 362
specifying mesh controls, 365
spectral-value-versus-frequency curve, 131
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
415
Index
spectrum analysis, 123
DDAM, 153
introduction to, 129
multi-point, 154
PSD
procedure, 145
sample input, 152
random vibration (PSD)
obtain the spectrum solution, 146
single-point
procedure, 130
single-point response
expand the modes, 134
obtain the modal solution, 131
obtain the spectrum solution, 131
spectrum data, 146
spectrum solution
random vibration (PSD) analysis, 146
single-point response spectrum analysis, 131
spectrum type
single-point response, 131
spin softening, 176
stability analysis, 155
static solution
buckling analysis, 158
static structural analysis
introduction to, 5
loading, 12
procedure, 5
stepped loads, 67, 94, 101, 110, 230
stiffness matrix
memory saving option, 219
strain
creep, 191
strain rate
creep, 191
strain rate effect, 8
stress calculations, 41, 79
stress concentration factors, 352
stress pass (see expansion pass)
stress relaxation, 191
stress singularities
accounting for in p-method, 368
PEXCLUDE command, 368
PINCLUDE command, 368
stress stiffening, 175
stress stiffening effects, 10, 119, 223
structural analyses
buckling, 155
fatigue, 351
harmonic response, 59
modal, 33
416
nonlinear, 169
spectrum, 129
static, 5
transient dynamic, 87
structural analysis, 1
element types, 2
nonlinear, 169
structural energy error estimation, 16
STURM number, 40
subgrid results, 374
subspace method, 35, 52
substeps, 170, 173, 219
swelling, 176, 197
swelling subroutine, 197
T
TABLE array parameters, 13
tabular listings, 16, 45, 70, 136, 227
tapered beams, 387
termination
solution, 9
thin wall sections, 383
time, 110, 119
time integration effects, 94, 119, 230
time step optimization
thermal, 224
time steps, 170, 173, 175, 219
automatic, 6, 93, 123, 156, 220
number of, 6, 93, 244
size of, 6, 93, 244
TOLER [CNVTOL], 220
transient dynamic analysis
full method
procedure, 89
introduction to, 87
load step options for, 97
methods of solution, 88
middle step residual, 120
mode-superposition method
procedure, 100
preparing for, 87
prestressed, 119
reduced method
procedure, 106
reduced solution, 106
transient integration parameters, 94, 101, 109, 230
true strain, 175
true stress, 175
Tsai-Wu failure criterion, 342
U
unstable structures
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Index
arc-length method, 238
nonlinear stabilization, 234
techniques for solving, 233
unsymmetric method, 35, 52
user defined material, 186
user mesh files, 391
USERSW, 197
V
vector displays, 16, 136
vector norms, 220
vector plots, 70
vibration analysis, 33
viscoelastic
material curve fitting, 274
viscoelasticity, 176, 196
element types, 196
viscoplasticity, 176, 195
element types, 195
large strain, 195
Voce hardening law, 178
W
wave propagation effects, 120
writing
user mesh, 382
Y
yield point, 177
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
417
418
Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 11.0 . SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Contains proprietary
and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.